WO2020192360A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020192360A1
WO2020192360A1 PCT/CN2020/077312 CN2020077312W WO2020192360A1 WO 2020192360 A1 WO2020192360 A1 WO 2020192360A1 CN 2020077312 W CN2020077312 W CN 2020077312W WO 2020192360 A1 WO2020192360 A1 WO 2020192360A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
resource
power
uplink
power difference
difference threshold
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/077312
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王婷
唐浩
唐臻飞
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020192360A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020192360A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04TPC
    • H04W52/30TPC using constraints in the total amount of available transmission power
    • H04W52/36TPC using constraints in the total amount of available transmission power with a discrete range or set of values, e.g. step size, ramping or offsets
    • H04W52/365Power headroom reporting
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04TPC
    • H04W52/30TPC using constraints in the total amount of available transmission power
    • H04W52/36TPC using constraints in the total amount of available transmission power with a discrete range or set of values, e.g. step size, ramping or offsets
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04TPC
    • H04W52/54Signalisation aspects of the TPC commands, e.g. frame structure
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/21Control channels or signalling for resource management in the uplink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards the network
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • a terminal can send uplink data to a network device, and a terminal can also send sidelink data to another terminal.
  • a transmission link for example, a shared radio frequency unit
  • the terminal cannot perform a certain data transmission process. Concurrency of uplink data and side link data. Therefore, how to enable the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data when the transmission link is shared, so as to improve the transmission efficiency, has become an urgent problem to be solved.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method and device for sending and receiving data.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which may be executed by a terminal, including: obtaining a power difference threshold, determining uplink power and side link power according to the power difference threshold, and The link power transmits uplink data, and the side link data is transmitted according to the side link power.
  • the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is less than or equal to the power difference threshold.
  • the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that the When the link and the side link share the transmission link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
  • the power difference threshold is obtained according to a resource interval, where the resource interval is the difference between the resources of the uplink data and the sidelink data
  • the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource distance range where the resource distance is located.
  • the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and the transmission sub-carrier spacing, wherein the transmission sub-carrier spacing is the uplink data and the side link
  • the subcarrier interval corresponding to the data obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval.
  • the power difference threshold is obtained according to a resource interval and a reference resource interval, where the resource interval is the resource of the uplink data and the side row The distance between the resources of the link data, and the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance.
  • the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval and the transmission sub-carrier interval, wherein the transmission sub-carrier interval is a sub-carrier corresponding to the uplink data and the side-link data.
  • the power difference threshold is obtained according to the resource spacing, the reference resource spacing range, the transmission subcarrier spacing, and the reference subcarrier spacing, where the resource spacing is the The distance between the resource of the uplink data and the resource of the side link data, the transmission subcarrier interval is the subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data, and the power difference The threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance range.
  • the method further includes: reporting the power difference capability and/or the resource spacing capability to the network device.
  • the power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link.
  • the resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
  • the method further includes: determining a power headroom according to the power difference threshold, and reporting the power headroom to a network device.
  • the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which may be executed by a network device, and includes: sending configuration information to a terminal, where the configuration information is used to configure a power difference threshold. Receiving uplink data or side link data from the terminal, wherein the difference between the uplink power of the uplink data and the side link power of the side link data is less than or equal to The power difference threshold.
  • the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that When the uplink and the side link share the transmission link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range where the resource spacing is located, wherein the resource spacing is the uplink The distance between the link data resource and the side link data resource.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and transmission subcarrier spacing, wherein the transmission subcarrier spacing is the uplink data The sub-carrier interval corresponding to the side link data.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval and transmission subcarrier interval, wherein the transmission subcarrier interval is the uplink data and the side The subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource spacing range.
  • the method further includes: receiving a power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability from the terminal.
  • the power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link.
  • the resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
  • the method further includes: receiving a power headroom from the terminal.
  • the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a device that can implement one or more of the corresponding functions of the first aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the device includes corresponding units or components for performing the above methods.
  • the units/modules included in the device can be implemented in software and/or hardware.
  • the device may be, for example, a terminal, or a network device (such as a base station), or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that can support the terminal or network device to implement the above-mentioned functions.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a device that can implement the corresponding functions of one or more of the foregoing second aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the device includes corresponding units or components for performing the above methods.
  • the units/modules included in the device can be implemented in software and/or hardware.
  • the device may be, for example, a terminal, or a network device (such as a base station), or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that can support the terminal or network device to implement the above-mentioned functions.
  • the present application provides an apparatus including: a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a program or instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor, the The device implements the method described in the first aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the present application provides a device, including: a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a program or instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor, the The device implements the method described in the foregoing second aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the present application provides a storage medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored.
  • the computer program or instruction executes the first aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect. The method described.
  • the present application provides a storage medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored.
  • the computer executes the above-mentioned second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect. The method described.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including: the device described in the fifth aspect and the device described in the sixth aspect.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applied by an embodiment provided by this application;
  • Figure 2 shows a schematic diagram of an example architecture of a communication system
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4A shows a schematic diagram of a resource spacing provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4B shows another schematic diagram of resource spacing provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4C shows another schematic diagram of resource spacing provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4D shows another schematic diagram of resource spacing provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4E shows another schematic diagram of resource spacing provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 shows an interactive schematic diagram of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6 shows a schematic diagram of interaction of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system structure.
  • the communication system includes one or more network devices (for clarity, the figure shows the network device 10 and the network device 20), and one or more terminal devices that communicate with the one or more network devices.
  • the terminal device 11 and the terminal device 12 shown in FIG. 1 communicate with the network device 10, and the terminal device 21 and the terminal device 22 shown in FIG. 1 communicate with the network device 20.
  • the terminal devices can also communicate with each other.
  • the terminal device 11 can communicate with the terminal device 12, the terminal device 11 can communicate with the terminal device 21, and the terminal device 11 can communicate with the terminal device 22.
  • the one or more terminal devices may not communicate with the network device.
  • network devices and terminal devices may also be referred to as communication devices.
  • the technology described in the embodiments of the present invention can be used in various communication systems, such as 2G, 3G, 4G, 4.5G, 5G communication systems, systems where multiple communication systems are integrated, or future evolution networks.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • NR new radio
  • WiFi wireless fidelity
  • 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
  • FIG 2 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a possible architecture of a communication system.
  • the network equipment in the radio access network is a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (CU).
  • unit, DU A base station with a separate architecture (such as gNodeB or gNB).
  • the RAN can be connected to a core network (for example, it can be an LTE core network, or a 5G core network, etc.).
  • CU and DU can be understood as the division of base stations from the perspective of logical functions.
  • CU and DU can be physically separated or deployed together. Multiple DUs can share one CU.
  • One DU can also be connected to multiple CUs (not shown in the figure).
  • the CU and DU can be connected through an interface, for example, an F1 interface.
  • CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network.
  • the functions of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer and the radio resource control (RRC) layer are set in the CU, while the radio link control (RLC) and media access control
  • the functions of the (media access control, MAC) layer and the physical layer are set in the DU.
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RRC radio resource control
  • RLC radio link control
  • the functions of the (media access control, MAC) layer and the physical layer are set in the DU.
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RRC radio resource control
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • the division of CU and DU processing functions according to this protocol layer is only an example, and it can also be divided in other ways.
  • CU or DU can be divided into functions with more protocol layers.
  • the CU or DU can also be divided into part
  • the functions of the CU or DU can also be divided according to business types or other system requirements. For example, it is divided by time delay, and functions whose processing time needs to meet the delay requirement are set in DU, and functions that do not need to meet the delay requirement are set in CU.
  • the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 can be applied to a 5G communication system, and it can also share one or more components or resources with an LTE system.
  • the CU may also have one or more functions of the core network.
  • One or more CUs can be set centrally or separately.
  • the CU can be set on the network side to facilitate centralized management.
  • the DU can have multiple radio frequency functions, or the radio frequency functions can be set remotely.
  • the function of the CU can be realized by one entity, or the control plane (CP) and the user plane (UP) can be further separated, that is, the control plane (CU-CP) and the user plane (CU-UP) of the CU can be composed of different functions It is realized by an entity, and the CU-CP and CU-UP can be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the function of the base station.
  • the network device can be any device with a wireless transceiver function.
  • the network device may be an access network device, and the access network device may also be called a radio access network (RAN) device, which is a device that provides wireless communication functions for terminal devices.
  • RAN radio access network
  • Network equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved base station in LTE (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B), base station in NR (gNodeB or gNB) or transmission receiving point/transmission reception point (TRP) , 3GPP subsequent evolution of base stations, access nodes in the WiFi system, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, network management equipment, etc.
  • the base station can be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small station, a relay station, or a balloon station, etc. Multiple base stations can support networks of the same technology mentioned above, or networks of different technologies mentioned above.
  • the base station can contain one or more co-site or non-co-site TRPs.
  • the network device may also be a wireless controller, CU, and/or DU in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario.
  • the network device can also be a server, a wearable device, or a vehicle-mounted device.
  • the network device may also be a network device in a future 5G network or a network device in a future evolved PLMN network.
  • the following description takes the network device as a base station as an example.
  • the multiple network devices may be base stations of the same type, or base stations of different types.
  • the base station can communicate with the terminal equipment, and it can also communicate with the terminal equipment through the relay station.
  • a terminal device can communicate with multiple base stations of different technologies.
  • a terminal device can communicate with a base station that supports an LTE network, can also communicate with a base station that supports a 5G network, and can also support communication with a base station of an LTE network and a base station of a 5G network. Double connection.
  • the device used to implement the function of the network device may be a network device; it may also be a device capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device.
  • a terminal is a device with a wireless transceiver function, which can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld, wearable or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on the water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons, etc.) And satellite class).
  • the terminal may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, virtual reality (VR) terminal equipment, augmented reality (AR) terminal equipment, industrial control (industrial control) Wireless terminals in control), vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation safety (transportation safety) ), wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, wearable terminal devices, and so on.
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented reality
  • industrial control industrial control
  • Wireless terminals in control vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation safety (transportation safety) ), wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, wearable terminal devices, and so on.
  • the embodiment of this application does not limit the application scenario.
  • Terminals can sometimes be referred to as terminal equipment, user equipment (UE), access terminal equipment, vehicle-mounted terminal, industrial control terminal, UE unit, UE station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal equipment, mobile Equipment, UE terminal equipment, terminal equipment, wireless communication equipment, UE agent or UE device, etc.
  • the terminal can also be fixed or mobile.
  • the device used to implement the function of the terminal may be a terminal; it may also be a device capable of supporting the terminal to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the terminal.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • a terminal can send uplink (UL) data to a network device, and a terminal can also send sidelink (SL) data to another terminal.
  • UL uplink
  • SL sidelink
  • a terminal if the uplink data and the transmission side uplink data share the transmission link (for example, share the radio frequency unit, or share the transmission carrier), due to the indicator constraints of the shared transmission link, the terminal is in the data transmission process , Concurrent uplink data and side-link data cannot be performed. Therefore, how to enable the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data when the transmission link is shared, so as to improve the transmission efficiency, has become an urgent problem to be solved.
  • the transmission link can also be called a baseband link, radio frequency link, transmission link, or channel bandwidth.
  • the transmission link may include a radio frequency processing link and/or a baseband processing link, etc.
  • the terminal device can support multiple transmission links.
  • the terminal device can use one or more transmission links to send signals on a link.
  • the terminal device may support the use of independent transmission links to send uplink signals and side link signals on one carrier.
  • the terminal device may support on one carrier, using the first transmission link to send uplink signals, and the second transmission link to send side-link signals.
  • the terminal device may support the use of a shared transmission link to transmit uplink signals and side link signals on one carrier.
  • the terminal equipment may support using a third transmission link to transmit uplink signals and side link signals on one carrier, and the third transmission link is the aforementioned shared transmission link.
  • the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that the When the link and the side link share the transmission link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in Fig. 3, the method of this embodiment may include:
  • the terminal U1 determines the uplink power P UL and the side link power P SL according to the power difference threshold P thr .
  • the difference between the uplink power and the side link power (which can also be understood as the absolute value of the difference between the uplink power and the side link power) is less than or equal to
  • the power difference threshold (also can be expressed as
  • the power difference threshold can be understood as the maximum difference between the uplink power and the side link power.
  • the difference between the uplink power and the side link power in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as the difference between the uplink power and the side link power on the same time domain resource .
  • the time domain resources in the present application may include at least one frame, at least one sub-frame, at least one slot, at least one mini-slot, or at least one time domain symbol.
  • the power difference threshold in the embodiment of the present application may also be a power ratio threshold.
  • the difference between the uplink power and the side link power may also be the uplink power and the side link power.
  • the ratio of link power or the ratio of the side link power to the uplink power will describe the power difference threshold and the difference between the uplink power and the side link power as an example in the following.
  • Part 310 The terminal U1 sends uplink data to the network device according to the uplink power P UL , and sends side uplink data to the terminal U2 according to the side link power P SL .
  • the network device receives the uplink data from the terminal U1, and the terminal U2 receives the side link data from the terminal U1.
  • the uplink data in the embodiments of the present application may be uplink physical signals.
  • the uplink data may be uplink demodulation reference signals (DM-RS), and uplink phase tracking reference signals (phase-tracking reference signals). tracking reference signals, PT-RS), or sounding reference signals (sounding reference signals, SRS).
  • the uplink data in the embodiments of the present application may also be information carried by an uplink physical channel.
  • the uplink data may be information carried by a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) and a physical uplink control channel (physical uplink shared channel, PUSCH).
  • the uplink data in the embodiments of the present application may also be uplink physical signals and information carried by uplink physical channels.
  • the uplink data in the embodiment of the present application may refer to data sent by a terminal and received by a network device.
  • the side link data in the embodiment of the present application may be a side link physical signal.
  • the side link data may be a side link DMRS or a side link synchronization signal.
  • the side link data in the embodiments of the present application may also be information carried by a side link physical channel.
  • the side link data may be a physical side link shared channel (PSSCH), Physical sidelink control channel (PSCCH), physical sidelink discovery channel (PSDCH), physical sidelink broadcast channel (PSBCH), physical side Information carried by the physical sidelink feedback channel (PSFCH) or the physical sidelink uplink control channel (PSUCCH).
  • PSSCH physical side link shared channel
  • PSCCH Physical sidelink control channel
  • PSDCH physical sidelink discovery channel
  • PSBCH physical sidelink broadcast channel
  • PSFCH physical sidelink feedback channel
  • PSUCCH physical sidelink uplink control channel
  • the sideline link data in the embodiment of the present application may also be a sideline physical signal or information carried by a sideline physical channel.
  • the side link data may include side link data (SL data), and/or side link control information (sidelink control information, SCI), and the SCI may also be referred to as sidelink scheduling assistance (sidelink scheduling assistance, SL SA) .
  • SL SA is information related to data scheduling, such as resource allocation and/or modulation and coding scheme (MCS) information used to carry PSSCH.
  • the sidelink data may include sidelink feedback control information (SFCI), and the sidelink feedback control information may also be referred to as sidelink feedback information for short.
  • the side link feedback control information may include one or more of channel state information (channel state information, CSI), hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) and other information.
  • the HARQ information may include an acknowledgement (acknowledgement, ACK) or a negative acknowledgement (negtive acknowledgement, NACK), etc.
  • the side link data in the embodiment of the present application may refer to data sent by a terminal and received by another terminal.
  • the side link (SL) in the embodiment of the present application may also be called a side link, a side link, or a device to device (D2D) link.
  • the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that the When the link shares the transmission link, it overcomes the index constraint and realizes the concurrency of uplink data and side link data, thereby improving transmission efficiency.
  • the uplink power determined according to the power difference threshold may be 0 (the unit may be a unit used to characterize power such as watts or milliwatts), then in the above section 310, according to the uplink power
  • the link power sending uplink data can be understood as not sending the uplink data.
  • the side link power determined according to the power difference threshold can be 0 (the unit may be a unit used to characterize power such as watts or milliwatts), then in the above section 310, according to the The side-link power transmission of the side-link data can be understood as not sending the side-link data.
  • the uplink power P UL and the side link power P SL in the above section 300 can be understood as the power difference threshold P thr and the adjustment front uplink power P′ UL and the adjustment front side uplink power P′
  • the foregoing pre-adjustment uplink power P′ UL and the foregoing adjustment front-side uplink power P′ SL can be understood as the uplink and side uplink power obtained without considering the power difference threshold P thr .
  • one of the adjusted uplink power P UL and the adjusted rear uplink power P SL is determined according to the power difference threshold P thr , the adjusted front uplink power P′ UL and the adjusted front uplink power P′ SL .
  • the reduced value of the larger one of SL P 'UL and P', holding P 'UL and P' SL smaller value of a constant to obtain the adjusted uplink
  • the power P UL and the rear side uplink power P SL are adjusted to satisfy that the difference between P UL and P SL is less than or equal to P thr .
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: Adjust according to power Decrease the value of the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the larger one is P′ SL ), and keep the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the smaller item in this example is P′ UL ).
  • P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
  • N SL is a positive integer
  • the value of can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example It can be 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25. Understandably, the above formula can also be Correspondingly, The value of can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example It can be -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25. It may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or may be indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information).
  • RRC signaling for example, RRC signaling
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: according to power Decrease the value of the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the larger one is P′ SL ), and keep the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the smaller item in this example is P′ UL ).
  • P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
  • ⁇ P SL represents the SL power adjustment amount
  • the value of ⁇ P SL can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example, ⁇ P SL can be a value such as 10, 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25.
  • the value of ⁇ P SL may be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example, ⁇ P SL may be -10 , -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25, etc.
  • ⁇ P SL may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information).
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: Adjust according to power Decrease the value of the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the larger one is P′ UL ), and keep the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the smaller term in this example is P′ SL ).
  • P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
  • N UL is a positive integer
  • the value of can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example It can be 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25. Understandably, the above formula can also be Correspondingly, The value of can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example It can be -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25. It may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or may be indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information).
  • RRC signaling for example, RRC signaling
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: according to power Reduce the value of the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL (the larger one is P′ UL in this example), and keep the value of the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL not Change (the smaller term in this example is P′ SL ).
  • P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
  • ⁇ P UL represents the UL power adjustment amount
  • the value of ⁇ P UL can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example, ⁇ P UL can be a value such as 10, 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25.
  • the value of ⁇ P UL can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example, ⁇ P UL can be -10 , -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25, etc.
  • ⁇ P UL may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (such as RRC signaling), or indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (such as downlink control information). It can be understood that ⁇ P UL and the above-mentioned ⁇ P SL can be the same parameter or different parameters; ⁇ P UL and the above-mentioned ⁇ P SL can be configured through the same high-level signaling, or through different high-level signaling; ⁇ P UL and the above-mentioned ⁇ P SL can be indicated by the same physical layer signaling (for example, the same downlink control information), or may be indicated by different physical layer signaling (for example, different downlink control information).
  • high-level signaling such as RRC signaling
  • physical layer signaling such as downlink control information
  • the difference between the adjusted uplink power P UL and the adjusted rear uplink power P SL is determined based on the power difference threshold P thr , the adjusted front uplink power P′ UL and the adjusted front uplink power P′ SL .
  • the increase in P 'and the UL P' is a value smaller SL, holding the value SL in a larger P 'and the UL P' unchanged, to obtain the adjusted uplink
  • the road power P UL and the rear side uplink power P SL are adjusted to satisfy that the difference between P UL and P SL is less than or equal to P thr .
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: Adjust according to power Increase the step size of the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL (the smaller one is P′ UL in this example), and keep the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the larger term in this example is P′ SL ).
  • P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
  • N UL is a positive integer
  • the value of can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example It can be 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25. Understandably, the above formula can also be Correspondingly, The value of can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example It can be -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25. It may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or may be indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information).
  • RRC signaling for example, RRC signaling
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: according to power Increase the value of the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the smaller one is P′ UL ), and keep the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the larger term in this example is P′ SL ).
  • P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
  • ⁇ P UL represents the UL power adjustment amount
  • ⁇ P UL may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (such as RRC signaling), or indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (such as downlink control information).
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: Adjust according to power Increase the step size of the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the smaller one is P′ SL ), and keep the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the larger item in this example is P′ UL ).
  • P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
  • N SL is a positive integer
  • the value of can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example It can be 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25. Understandably, the above formula can also be Correspondingly, The value of can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example It can be -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25. It may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or may be indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information).
  • RRC signaling for example, RRC signaling
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: according to power Increase the value of the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the smaller one is P′ SL ), and keep the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the larger item in this example is P′ UL ).
  • P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
  • ⁇ P SL represents the SL power adjustment amount
  • the value of ⁇ P SL can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example, ⁇ P SL can be a value such as 10, 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25.
  • the value of ⁇ P SL can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example, ⁇ P SL can be -10 , -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25, etc.
  • ⁇ P SL may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information).
  • the difference between the adjusted uplink power P UL and the adjusted rear uplink power P SL is determined based on the power difference threshold P thr , the adjusted front uplink power P′ UL and the adjusted front uplink power P′ SL .
  • the reduced value of P 'UL and P' SL larger one, increased P 'UL and P' SL smaller one of the values to obtain an uplink adjustment The power P UL and the rear side uplink power P SL are adjusted to satisfy that the difference between P UL and P SL is less than or equal to P thr .
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be:
  • -P thr ) is divided equally to obtain the average power ((
  • P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
  • P UL P′ UL +(
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: ′
  • -P thr ) is distributed proportionally ⁇ to obtain the proportional distribution power ((
  • P UL P′ UL +(
  • P UL and P SL determined according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL may satisfy the following formula:
  • satisfies 0 ⁇ 1.
  • may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (such as RRC signaling), or indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (such as downlink control information).
  • can satisfy one of the following:
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be:
  • -P thr ) is divided equally to obtain the average power ((
  • P UL and P SL determined according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
  • P SL P′ SL +(
  • the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: ′
  • -P thr ) is distributed proportionally ⁇ to obtain the proportional distribution power ((
  • P UL and P SL determined according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL may satisfy the following formula:
  • P SL P′ SL +(
  • the interference during the concurrency of the uplink and the side link can be reduced, thereby enabling the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data.
  • the transmission efficiency is improved.
  • the terminal may also determine whether U1 uplink data according to the line side and the P UL and P 'as compared to the amount of change of the UL or P SL and P' is compared to the amount of change SL Concurrency of link data.
  • P UL and P' determines whether to transmit uplink data amount of change compared to UL one possible embodiment, P UL and P' is reduced as compared UL x 1%, when x 1 is greater than or equal to the threshold When the limit is X 1 , the terminal U1 will not send uplink data.
  • the threshold value X 1 may be predefined or configured by the network device.
  • P UL and P' UL increase compared x 2%, when x 2 is greater than or equal to When the threshold is X 2 , the terminal U1 will not send uplink data.
  • the threshold X 2 may be predefined or configured by the network device.
  • SL P and P 'side determines whether to transmit uplink data compared to the amount of change SL one possible embodiment, P SL and P' is reduced as compared SL y 1%, if y 1 is greater than or equal to When the threshold is Y 1 , the terminal U1 will not send side uplink data.
  • the threshold Y 1 may be predefined or configured by the network device.
  • SL P and P 'side determines whether to transmit uplink data compared to the amount of change SL another possible embodiment, P SL and P' SL increase compared y 2%, or greater than when y 2 when the threshold value is equal to Y 2, a terminal U1 will not send downlink data side.
  • the threshold Y 2 may be predefined or configured by the network device.
  • the terminal U1 may also determine the uplink power and the side link power according to path loss parameters (such as path loss values), where the path loss parameters are the difference between the terminal U1 and the network device.
  • path loss parameters such as path loss values
  • the terminal U1 determines the uplink power and the side link power according to a predefined path loss parameter or configured by a network device.
  • the terminal U1 may also use different path loss parameters to determine the uplink power and/or the side link when the uplink data and the side link data are concurrent and non-concurrent.
  • Link power For example, the terminal U1 uses the path loss parameter between the terminal U1 and the network device to determine the uplink power and the side link power when the uplink data and the side link data are concurrent.
  • the path loss parameter between the terminal U1 and the terminal U2 is used to determine the uplink power or the side link power.
  • the terminal U1 uses the path loss parameter between the terminal U1 and the terminal U2 to determine the uplink power and the side link power when the uplink data and the side link data are concurrent.
  • the path loss parameter between the terminal U1 and the network device is used to determine the uplink power or the side link power.
  • the method may further include part 320: the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr .
  • the power difference threshold may be pre-defined or pre-configured, and may also be configured or instructed by the network device or other terminal.
  • the terminal U1 can obtain the power difference threshold predefined in the protocol.
  • the terminal U1 may obtain the power difference threshold through pre-configuration parameters.
  • the terminal U1 may obtain the aforementioned power difference threshold through a pre-configured parameter in a subscriber identification module (SIM) or a universal subscriber identity module (USIM).
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • USIM universal subscriber identity module
  • the SIM may also be called a user identification card, a smart card, etc.
  • the USIM may also be called an upgraded SIM, etc.
  • the pre-configuration parameters may also be called pre-configuration signaling, pre-configuration information and other names.
  • the method may further include part 330: the network device sends configuration information to the terminal U1, and the terminal U1 receives the configuration information.
  • the configuration information is used to configure or instruct the The power difference threshold P thr .
  • the configuration information may include one or more of system information, information carried by public RRC signaling, information carried by dedicated RRC signaling, or downlink control information.
  • the terminal U1 may determine the power difference threshold P thr according to a priority rule, where the priority rule specifies a priority among multiple types of information.
  • the above priority rule specifies the following information with priority from high to low: downlink control information, information carried by dedicated RRC signaling, information carried by public RRC signaling, system information, and pre-configuration information.
  • the priority rule can also be understood as that downlink control information can overwrite information carried by dedicated RRC signaling, information carried by public RRC signaling, system information, or pre-configuration information, and information carried by dedicated RRC signaling can be Overwrite information, system information, or pre-configuration information carried by public RRC signaling.
  • Information carried by public RRC signaling can overwrite system information or pre-configuration information.
  • System information can overwrite pre-configuration information. Can be called coverage.
  • the terminal U1 may determine that the power difference threshold P thr is configured or indicated in the higher priority information.
  • part 330 may also be: the terminal U2 sends configuration information to the terminal U1, and the terminal U1 receives the configuration information, and the configuration information is used to configure or indicate the power difference threshold P thr .
  • the configuration information may configure a power difference threshold P thr
  • the terminal U1 may receive the configuration information to obtain the power difference threshold P thr .
  • the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to an index, a number, or an enumeration parameter, where the index, a number, or an enumeration parameter is used to identify The power difference threshold P thr , and the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the index, number, or enumeration parameter.
  • the corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the index, number, or enumeration parameter may be predefined, or may be configured or indicated by the network device or other terminal.
  • the terminal U1 can obtain the aforementioned index, number, or enumeration parameter, and obtain the power difference threshold P thr according to the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold P thr and the index, number, or enumeration parameter.
  • the configuration sent by the network device or terminal U2 to the terminal U1 The information can be used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold P thr and the index, number, or enumeration parameter.
  • the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the index and the power difference threshold shown in Table 1.
  • the configuration information sent by the network device or the terminal U2 to the terminal U1 may also be configured with the aforementioned index for identifying P thr (which can also be understood as an index corresponding to P thr ).
  • the configuration information sent by the network device or terminal U2 to the terminal U1 is configured with The corresponding index "1", the terminal U1 can obtain the power difference threshold according to the index "1"
  • the power difference threshold can be configured in a quantized manner, thereby reducing the configuration overhead of the power difference threshold.
  • the corresponding relationship is predefined.
  • the corresponding relationship between the index and the power difference threshold illustrated in this example may be predefined.
  • the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource distance Rt, where the resource distance Rt is the resource of the uplink data and the side
  • the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the resource interval Rt, or the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located.
  • the corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the larger the resource interval Rt the larger the power difference threshold P thr corresponding to the resource interval Rt.
  • different resource spacing Rt may also correspond to the same power difference threshold P thr .
  • the terminal U1 can determine the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located, and according to the power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located The corresponding relationship obtains the power difference threshold P thr .
  • the pitch range in this application can be understood as including a collection of multiple different pitches.
  • the resource spacing range can be understood as including a collection of multiple different resource spacings.
  • the distance range may also be referred to as a distance range, a distance interval, or a distance interval, which is not limited in this application.
  • the uplink data resource in this application may be the frequency domain resource FU allocated for the uplink data, or may be a frequency domain resource set containing the frequency domain resource FU.
  • the resource of side link data in this application may be a frequency domain resource FS allocated for the side link data, or may be a frequency domain resource set containing the frequency domain resource FS.
  • the frequency domain resource or frequency domain resource set in this application may include at least one carrier (carrier), at least one component carrier (CC), at least one bandwidth part (BWP), and at least one resource block group (resource).
  • carrier carrier
  • component carrier CC
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • resource block group resource block group
  • RBG resource block group
  • PRG physical resource-block group
  • resource block resource block
  • SC sub-carrier
  • the aforementioned BWP may include uplink BWP and side link BWP.
  • Uplink data may be transmitted in the uplink BWP
  • side link data may be transmitted in the side link BWP.
  • the uplink BWP and the side link BWP may completely overlap, partially overlap, or not overlap.
  • the uplink BWP may include resources of uplink data
  • the side link BWP may include resources of side link data.
  • the resource of uplink data can also be understood as the resource of uplink data transmission
  • the resource of side-link data can also be understood as the resource of side-link data transmission.
  • the resource interval Rt in this application may be the interval between the starting frequency domain resource in the uplink data resource and the starting frequency domain resource in the side link data resource.
  • the resource interval Rt in this application may be the interval between the end frequency domain resource in the uplink data resource and the end frequency domain resource in the side link data resource.
  • the resource interval Rt in this application may be the interval between the start frequency domain resource in the uplink data resource and the end frequency domain resource in the side link data resource.
  • the resource interval Rt in this application may be the interval between the end frequency domain resource in the uplink data resource and the start frequency domain resource in the side link data resource.
  • the resource spacing Rt in this application may be the spacing between the center frequency domain resource in the uplink data resource and the center frequency domain resource in the side link data resource.
  • the resource spacing Rt in this application can be expressed by the number of resources (for example, the number of RBs, the number of RBGs, or the number of subcarriers, etc.), and can also be expressed in frequency units or bandwidth units (for example, megahertz (M) or megahertz (MHz), etc.) Said.
  • M megahertz
  • MHz megahertz
  • the configuration sent by the network device or terminal U2 to the terminal U1 The information can be used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located.
  • the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the resource spacing range and the power difference threshold illustrated in Table 2.
  • the R0, R1, R2, and R3 illustrated in Table 2 respectively represent four resource spacing ranges.
  • the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located is Rj among R0, R1, R2, and R3 (j is 0, 1, 2 or 3), and the terminal U1 will obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the resource interval range Rj
  • the resource spacing ranges represented by R0, R1, R2, and R3 are less than or equal to 5M, greater than 5M and less than or equal to 10M, greater than 10M and less than or equal to 20M, and greater than 20M, and the resource spacing represented by Rt is 6M.
  • the terminal U1 will obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the resource spacing range R1
  • the power difference threshold can be determined according to the resource distribution of different links, so that the power difference threshold under different resource distributions can be adjusted adaptively, and resource utilization efficiency can be improved.
  • the corresponding relationship is predefined.
  • the corresponding relationship between the resource spacing range and the power difference threshold illustrated in this example may be predefined.
  • the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt and the transmission subcarrier interval St, where the resource interval Rt is the uplink data
  • the distance between the resource of and the resource of the side link data, and the transmission subcarrier interval St is the subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data.
  • the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the resource interval Rt and the transmission subcarrier interval St, or the resource interval range in which the power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval Rt are located and the transmission subcarrier interval
  • the carrier interval St has a corresponding relationship.
  • the corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the terminal U1 can determine the resource spacing range where the resource spacing Rt is located and the transmission subcarrier spacing St, and based on the range of power resources pitch difference threshold P thr pitch Rt resource is located, and said transmission subcarrier having a correspondence relationship St obtaining the power difference threshold P thr interval.
  • the transmission subcarrier interval in this application may also be referred to as subcarrier interval, system parameter, or frame structure parameter (numerology).
  • the subcarrier interval in this application is a transmission parameter (which can be understood as a frequency domain transmission parameter) used in data transmission.
  • the subcarrier interval may be 15kHz, 30kHz, 60kHz, 120kHz, 240kHz, or 480kHz.
  • the sub-carrier interval corresponding to uplink data in this application is the sub-carrier interval used for uplink data transmission, and the sub-carrier interval corresponding to side-link data in this application is when side-link data transmission is performed.
  • the network device or The configuration information sent by the terminal U2 to the terminal U1 may be used to configure the correspondence between the resource interval range where the power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval Rt are located, and the transmission subcarrier interval St.
  • the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the transmission subcarrier spacing and the resource spacing range and the power difference threshold illustrated in Table 3.
  • the S0 and S1 illustrated in Table 3 indicate two transmission subcarrier spacings, respectively.
  • R00 and R01 respectively represent two resource spacing ranges corresponding to the transmission subcarrier spacing S0, and
  • R10 and R11 respectively represent two resource spacing ranges corresponding to the transmission subcarrier spacing S1.
  • the transmission subcarrier spacing St is Si in S0 and S1 (i is 0 or 1)
  • the resource spacing range of the resource spacing Rt is Rij (j is 0 or 1) in Ri0 and Ri1
  • the terminal U1 will Obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the resource spacing range Rij (It can also be understood that the terminal U1 will obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the resource spacing range Rij under the transmission subcarrier spacing Si ).
  • the power difference threshold can be determined according to the resource distribution of different subcarrier intervals and different links, so that the power difference threshold under different subcarrier intervals and different resource distributions can be adjusted adaptively, and resource utilization efficiency can be improved. .
  • the corresponding relationship is predefined.
  • the resource spacing range illustrated in this example and the correspondence between the transmission subcarrier spacing and the power difference threshold may be predefined.
  • the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt and the reference resource interval Rr, where the resource interval Rt is the value of the uplink data
  • the distance between the resource and the resource of the side link data, and the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance Rr.
  • the corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the reference resource distance in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as a resource distance used for reference or as a benchmark, and other resource distances can be determined according to the reference resource distance.
  • the power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource interval may also be referred to as the reference power difference threshold.
  • the power difference threshold corresponding to other resource intervals can be determined, or the power difference threshold corresponding to other resource intervals can be determined according to the reference resource interval.
  • the reference power difference threshold may be predefined by the protocol, or may be configured or instructed by the network device or other terminal.
  • the terminal U1 may be based on the resource distance Rt, the reference resource distance Rr, and the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource distance Rr
  • the power difference threshold P thr is obtained .
  • the resource distance Rt is the distance between the resource of the uplink data and the resource of the side link data
  • the reference power difference threshold It has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance Rr, and the corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval Rr and the reference power difference threshold There is a corresponding relationship, and the corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the configuration information sent by the network device or the terminal U2 to the terminal U1 can be used to configure the reference power difference threshold. Correspondence with the reference resource distance Rr.
  • the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the reference resource spacing and the reference power difference threshold illustrated in Table 4.
  • Rr illustrated in Table 4 represents a reference resource spacing. Indicates the reference power difference threshold corresponding to Rr.
  • the terminal U1 is based on the aforementioned resource distance Rt and the aforementioned reference resource distance Rr, and the reference power difference threshold
  • the obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
  • C 0 is an integer or a real number
  • log represents a logarithm based on 2, the natural constant e, or 10.
  • the terminal U1 is based on the above-mentioned resource distance Rt and the above-mentioned reference resource distance Rr, and the reference power difference threshold
  • the obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
  • C 1 is an integer or a real number
  • m ⁇ represents a power with m as the base, where m can be an integer (such as 1, 2, or 10) or a natural constant e.
  • the content of the configuration information can be reduced, thereby reducing the configuration overhead.
  • the corresponding relationship is predefined.
  • the correspondence between the reference resource spacing and the power difference threshold illustrated in this example may be predefined.
  • the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval Rrt, and the transmission subcarrier interval St, where the resource interval Rt is The distance between the resources of the uplink data and the resources of the side link data, the transmission subcarrier interval St is the subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data, and
  • the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rrt and the transmission subcarrier interval St. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the terminal U1 may obtain the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval Rrt, the transmission subcarrier interval St, and the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource interval Rrt and the transmission subcarrier interval St.
  • the resource distance Rt is the distance between the resources of the uplink data and the resources of the side link data
  • the transmission subcarrier interval St is the distance between the uplink data and the side link data.
  • the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rrt and the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission subcarrier interval St.
  • the corresponding relationship may be predefined or may be It is configured or instructed by network equipment or other terminals.
  • the reference power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rrt and the transmission sub-carrier interval St. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or may be configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the network device or the terminal U2 reports to the terminal U1
  • the sent configuration information may be used to configure the correspondence between the reference power difference threshold and the reference resource interval Rrt and the transmission subcarrier interval St.
  • the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the transmission subcarrier spacing and the reference resource spacing and the reference power difference threshold illustrated in Table 5.
  • S0 and S1 illustrated in Table 5 indicate two transmission subcarrier spacings, respectively.
  • Rr0 and Rr1 represent the reference resource intervals corresponding to S0 and S1, respectively.
  • the transmission subcarrier interval St is Si in S0 and S1 (i is 0 or 1)
  • the reference resource interval Rrt is Rri in Rr0 and Rr1 (i is 0 or 1)
  • the terminal U1 is based on the above resource interval Rt.
  • the obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
  • C 2 is an integer or a real number
  • log represents a logarithm based on 2, the natural constant e, or 10.
  • the terminal U1 is based on the reference power threshold corresponding to the foregoing resource interval Rt, reference resource interval Rri, and transmission subcarrier interval Si
  • the obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
  • C 3 is an integer or a real number
  • m ⁇ represents a power to the base m
  • m can be an integer (such as 1, 2, or 10) or a natural constant e.
  • the content of the configuration information can be reduced, thereby reducing the configuration overhead.
  • the corresponding relationship is predefined.
  • the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval illustrated in this example is predefined.
  • the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval Rr, the transmission subcarrier interval St, and the reference subcarrier interval Sr.
  • the resource distance Rt is the distance between the resources of the uplink data and the resources of the side link data
  • the transmission subcarrier interval St is the distance between the uplink data and the side link data.
  • the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rr and the reference subcarrier interval Sr.
  • the corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal. This correspondence can be understood as the correspondence between the power difference threshold P thr and the reference resource distance Rr under the reference subcarrier interval Sr.
  • the reference subcarrier interval Sr may be predefined or determined by Configured or instructed by network equipment or other terminals.
  • the reference subcarrier interval in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as a subcarrier interval used for reference or as a reference, and the resource interval under other subcarrier intervals can be determined according to the reference subcarrier interval, or according to the subcarrier interval
  • the interval can determine the power difference threshold under other sub-carrier intervals.
  • the reference resource distance in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as a reference resource distance, and other resource distances can be determined according to the reference resource distance, or the power difference threshold corresponding to other resource distances can be determined according to the reference resource distance.
  • the reference power difference threshold may be predefined by the protocol, or may be configured or instructed by the network device or other terminal.
  • the terminal U1 may be based on the resource spacing Rt, the transmission subcarrier spacing St, the reference subcarrier spacing Sr, the reference resource spacing Rr, and the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource spacing Rr and the reference subcarrier spacing Sr
  • the power difference threshold P thr is obtained .
  • the resource distance Rt is the distance between the resource of the uplink data and the resource of the side link data
  • the reference power difference threshold There is a correspondence with the reference resource interval Rr and the reference subcarrier interval Sr, and the correspondence may be predefined, or may be configured or indicated by a network device or other terminal.
  • the power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval Rt, the transmission subcarrier interval St and the reference power difference threshold Have a corresponding relationship. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the network device or the terminal U2 sends the information to the terminal U1
  • the configuration information may be used to configure the correspondence between the reference power difference threshold and the reference resource interval Rr and the reference subcarrier interval Sr.
  • the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the reference subcarrier spacing and reference resource spacing and the reference power difference threshold illustrated in Table 6.
  • Sr illustrated in Table 6 represents the reference subcarrier spacing
  • Rr represents the reference resource spacing.
  • the terminal U1 is based on the reference power threshold corresponding to the aforementioned resource spacing Rt, transmission subcarrier spacing St, reference resource spacing Rr, and reference subcarrier spacing St
  • the obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
  • C 4 is an integer or a real number
  • log represents a logarithm based on 2, the natural constant e, or 10.
  • the terminal U1 is based on the reference power threshold corresponding to the foregoing resource spacing Rt, transmission subcarrier spacing St, reference resource spacing Rr, and reference subcarrier spacing Sr
  • the obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
  • C 5 is an integer or a real number
  • m ⁇ represents a power with m as the base, where m can be an integer (such as 1, 2, or 10) or a natural constant e.
  • the content of the configuration information can be reduced, thereby reducing the configuration overhead.
  • the corresponding relationship is predefined.
  • the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval illustrated in this example is predefined.
  • the corresponding relationship may be as shown in Table 7.
  • the terminal may select the reference resource interval Rri (i is 1, 2, ..., N) closest to the resource interval Rt to calculate the power difference threshold corresponding to the resource interval Rt. For example, if the value of
  • the terminal U1 may obtain the power difference threshold according to the correspondence between the power difference threshold P thr and the reference resource interval Rr and the reference power difference threshold. P thr .
  • the terminal U1 can determine the transmission subcarrier interval St, the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference subcarrier interval Sr and the reference resource interval Rr.
  • the power difference threshold P thr and the transmission resource interval Rt under the carrier interval St have a corresponding relationship, and the terminal U1 can rely on the aforementioned power difference threshold P thr and the transmission resource interval Rt, the transmission subcarrier interval St, and the reference subcarrier interval Sr and
  • the power difference threshold P thr is obtained by referring to the corresponding relationship of the resource interval Rr.
  • the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval range Rrr, the transmission subcarrier interval St, and the reference subcarrier interval Sr.
  • the resource distance Rt is the distance between the resources of the uplink data and the resources of the side link data
  • the transmission subcarrier interval St is the distance between the uplink data and the side link data.
  • the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval range Rrr. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the reference subcarrier spacing Sr may be predefined or may be Configured or instructed by network equipment or other terminals. It can be understood that the reference subcarrier interval in the embodiments of the present application can be understood as a subcarrier interval used for reference or as a reference, and the resource interval range under other subcarrier intervals can be determined according to the reference subcarrier interval, or according to the reference subcarrier interval. The carrier interval can determine the power difference threshold under other sub-carrier intervals.
  • the reference resource spacing range in the embodiments of the present application can be understood as a resource spacing range used for reference or as a benchmark. According to the reference resource spacing range, other resource spacing ranges can be determined, or the reference resource spacing range can be used to determine the spacing from other resources.
  • the power difference threshold corresponding to the range.
  • the terminal U1 may have a power difference threshold P thr and the reference resource spacing range Rrr. To obtain the power difference threshold P thr .
  • the terminal U1 may determine the transmission subcarrier interval St according to the transmission subcarrier interval St, the reference subcarrier interval Sr, and the reference resource interval range Rrr.
  • the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the transmission resource interval range Rtr, and the transmission resource interval range Rtr includes the aforementioned resource interval Rt, then the terminal U1 can be based on the corresponding relationship between the aforementioned power difference threshold P thr and the transmission resource interval range Rtr
  • the power difference threshold P thr is obtained .
  • the power difference threshold can be determined according to the resource distribution of different subcarrier intervals and different links, so that the power difference threshold under different subcarrier intervals and different resource distributions can be adjusted adaptively, and resource utilization efficiency can be improved.
  • the reference resource spacing range under the reference subcarrier spacing the content of the configuration information can be reduced, thereby reducing the configuration overhead.
  • the configuration information sent by the network device or the terminal U2 to the terminal U1 can be used for The corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold P thr and the reference resource distance range Rrr is configured.
  • the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the reference resource spacing range and the power difference threshold under the reference subcarrier spacing Sr illustrated in Table 8.
  • Rrr0 and Rrr1 illustrated in Table 8 indicate two reference resource spacings range.
  • the reference resource interval range Rrrj (j is 0 or 1) in Rrr0 and Rrr1 includes the aforementioned resource interval Rt, and the terminal U1 will obtain the reference resource interval range Rrrj Corresponding power difference threshold
  • the terminal U1 can determine the transmission subcarrier interval St according to the transmission subcarrier interval St, the reference subcarrier interval Sr, and the reference resource interval ranges Rrr0 and Rrr1 Transmission resource spacing range Rtr0 and Rtr1 and power difference threshold with It has the corresponding relationship as shown in Table 9.
  • the transmission resource spacing range Rtrj (j is 0 or 1) in Rtr0 and Rtr1 includes the above-mentioned resource spacing Rt, and the terminal U1 will obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission resource spacing range Rtrj
  • Dtrj_min Drrj_min*
  • , Dtrj_max Drrj_max*
  • Dtrj_min Drrj_min ⁇
  • , Dtrj_max Drrj_max ⁇
  • Dtrj_min Drrj_min*2
  • Dtrj_max Drrj_max*2
  • Dtrj_min Drrj_min ⁇ 2
  • Dtrj_max Drrj_max ⁇ 2
  • Dtrj_min and Drrj_min and between Dtrj_max and Drrj_max may be predefined, or may be configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the corresponding relationship is predefined.
  • the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource spacing range illustrated in this example is predefined.
  • the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval range Rrr, the transmission subcarrier interval St, and the reference subcarrier interval Sr.
  • the reference resource spacing range Rrr and the reference subcarrier spacing Sr correspond to the reference power difference threshold
  • the configuration information sent by the network device or the terminal U2 to the terminal U1 can be used for configuration
  • the above power difference threshold Correspondence with the reference resource spacing range Rrr and the reference subcarrier spacing Sr.
  • the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the reference resource interval range and the power difference threshold under the reference subcarrier interval Sr illustrated in Table 10.
  • Rrr illustrated in Table 10 represents the reference resource interval range, and Sr represents Reference subcarrier spacing.
  • one or more other reference resource spacing ranges and one or more reference power differences corresponding to the other one or more reference resource spacing ranges can be obtained Threshold. For example, it can be determined as follows.
  • the reference resource distance range Rrr be [Rrr_min, Rrr_max], where Rrr_min and Rrr_max represent the minimum and maximum value of the reference resource distance in the reference resource distance range Rrr.
  • One or more additional reference resource distance ranges can be determined according to the reference resource distance range.
  • the additional reference resource distance range is [Rrri_min, Rrri_max], where i can take values of 0, 1, ..., N.
  • Rrri_min and Rrri_max can satisfy the following formula:
  • Rrri_min and Rrr_max and Rrr_min may be predefined, or may be configured or indicated by a network device or other terminal.
  • the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource spacing range Rrri Can be based on the reference resource spacing range Rrr and the reference power threshold Determine that the reference power difference threshold Distance from reference resource range Rrri, reference resource distance range Rrr, and reference power threshold Have a corresponding relationship.
  • the corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or indicated by a network device or other terminal. Among them, i can take the value 0, 1, ..., N. Among them, N is a positive integer.
  • the terminal U1 is based on the reference resource distance range Rrri and the reference resource distance range Rrr, and the reference power difference threshold Obtained power difference threshold The following formula can be satisfied:
  • C 6 is an integer or a real number
  • log represents a logarithm based on 2, the natural constant e, or 10.
  • the terminal U1 is based on the reference resource distance range Rrri and the reference resource distance range Rrr, and the reference power difference threshold Obtained power difference threshold The following formula can be satisfied:
  • C 7 is an integer or a real number
  • m ⁇ represents a power with m as the base, where m can be an integer (such as 1, 2, or 10) or a natural constant e.
  • the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource spacing range Rrri Can be based on the reference power threshold Determine that the reference power difference threshold With reference power threshold Have a corresponding relationship.
  • the corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or indicated by a network device or other terminal. Among them, i can take the value 0, 1, ..., N. Among them, N is a positive integer.
  • the terminal U1 is based on the reference resource distance range Rrri and the reference resource distance range Rrr, and the reference power difference threshold Obtained power difference threshold The following formula can be satisfied:
  • C 8 is an integer or a real number.
  • the terminal U1 is based on the reference resource distance range Rrri and the reference resource distance range Rrr, and the reference power difference threshold Obtained power difference threshold The following formula can be satisfied:
  • C 9 is an integer or a real number.
  • the content in Table 11 below can be obtained, that is, one can be determined according to a reference resource spacing and a corresponding reference power difference threshold. Or multiple reference resource intervals and corresponding one or more reference power difference thresholds. For details, reference may be made to the above manner, or other manners may also be adopted, and specifically, this application does not limit this.
  • the content of the configuration information can be reduced, thereby reducing the configuration overhead.
  • the reference resource interval range in Rrri (i can take a value of 0, 1, 2, ..., N) includes the above resource interval Rt, and the terminal U1 will obtain Power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource spacing range Rrri
  • the terminal U1 can determine the transmission resource under the transmission subcarrier interval St according to the transmission subcarrier interval St, the reference subcarrier interval Sr, and the reference resource interval range Rrri Spacing range Rtri and power difference threshold It has the corresponding relationship as shown in Table 12.
  • the transmission resource spacing range Rtri in Rtri (i is 0, 1,..., N) includes the above resource spacing Rt, and the terminal U1 will obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission resource spacing range Rtri
  • the power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission subcarrier interval and the transmission resource interval range may be obtained.
  • the following Table 12 can be obtained, that is, the transmission subcarrier spacing and the transmission resource spacing range correspond to The power difference threshold.
  • the power difference threshold it can be determined as follows. Alternatively, other methods may also be used, and specifically, this application does not limit this.
  • Drri_min and Drri_max respectively represent the minimum and maximum values of the reference resource distance in the reference resource distance range Rrri
  • Dtri_min and Dtri_max respectively represent the minimum and maximum values of the transmission resource distance in the transmission resource distance range Rtri.
  • the above Dtri_min and Dtri_max can satisfy the following formula:
  • Dtri_min Drri_min*
  • , Dtri_max Drri_max*
  • Dtri_min Drri_min ⁇
  • , Dtri_max Drri_max ⁇
  • Dtri_min Drri_min*2
  • Dtri_max Drri_max*2
  • Dtri_min Drri_min ⁇ 2
  • Dtri_max Drri_max ⁇ 2
  • Dtri_min and Drri_min, and Dtri_max and Drri_max may be predefined, or may be configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
  • the power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission subcarrier interval and the transmission resource interval range is the same as the reference power difference threshold. That is, under the transmission subcarrier interval, the power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission resource interval range Rtri is equal to the power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource interval range Rrri under the reference subcarrier interval.
  • the following Table 12 can be obtained, that is, the transmission subcarrier spacing and the transmission resource spacing range correspond to The power difference threshold.
  • Table 12 For details, reference may be made to the above manner, or other manners may also be adopted, and specifically, this application does not limit this.
  • the corresponding relationship is predefined.
  • the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource spacing range illustrated in this example is predefined.
  • the method may further include part 340: the terminal U1 reports the power difference capability and/or the resource spacing capability to the network device or the terminal U2, and the network device or the terminal U2 receives the Power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability.
  • the above-mentioned power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link (also can be understood as the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link on the same time domain resources) Maximum power difference), the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link (also can be understood as the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link on the same time domain resource), or the uplink
  • the power difference range supported by the road and side links also can be understood as the power difference range supported by the uplink and side links on the same time domain resources).
  • the aforementioned resource spacing capabilities include one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the link.
  • the network device or terminal U2 After receiving the aforementioned power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability, the network device or terminal U2 can allocate uplink power and/or side link power to the terminal U1 according to the power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability, thereby Can improve the use efficiency of power resources.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of interaction of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in FIG. 5, the method of this embodiment may include:
  • Part 500 The terminal U1 reports the power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability to the network device or terminal U2, and the network device or terminal U2 receives the power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability.
  • the power difference capability and the resource spacing capability refer to the description of part 340 in FIG. 3.
  • the network device or terminal U2 sends power control information to the terminal U1, and the terminal U1 receives the power control information.
  • the power control information includes power parameters for determining the uplink power and the side link power.
  • the power parameter may include one or more of the following parameters: closed-loop power parameters, or open-loop power parameters, etc., wherein the number of the closed-loop power parameters may be one or more, and the number of the open-loop power parameters There can be one or more.
  • the closed-loop power parameter may refer to the power parameter in the closed-loop power calculation, such as power control signaling in physical layer signaling, specifically, for example, transmission power control (TPC) in downlink control information. Signaling etc.
  • the open-loop power parameter may refer to the power parameter in the open-loop power calculation, such as a path loss compensation factor, the maximum transmission power of the terminal, and so on.
  • closed-loop power control may mean that the transmitting end controls the transmitting power according to the feedback information sent by the receiving end.
  • Open-loop power control can mean that it does not require feedback information from the receiving end and performs power control based on its own measurement.
  • Part 520 The terminal U1 determines the uplink power and the side link power according to the above power control information, that is, the terminal U1 determines the uplink power and usage for transmitting uplink data according to the power parameters in the above power control information.
  • Part 530 The terminal U1 sends uplink data to the network device according to the uplink power, and sends side link data to the terminal U2 according to the side link power.
  • the network device receives the uplink data from the terminal U1, and the terminal U2 receives the side link data from the terminal U1.
  • the network device or other terminal can allocate appropriate power parameters to the terminal according to the power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability reported by the terminal, so that the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power based on the power parameter. It can overcome the indicator constraints when sharing the transmission link, and realize the concurrency of uplink data and side link data, thereby improving transmission efficiency.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of interaction of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in Figure 6, the method of this embodiment may include:
  • the terminal U1 determines the power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr .
  • the power headroom includes one or more of the following: uplink power headroom Uplink minimum power headroom Maximum uplink power headroom Side link power headroom Minimum power headroom of side link Or the maximum power margin of the side link
  • the power headroom in this application may also be referred to as headroom power, power headroom report (PHR), power redundancy, redundant power, surplus power, or power surplus, etc.
  • PHR power headroom report
  • P thr reference may be made to the description of the power difference threshold in the method illustrated in FIG. 3, which is not repeated here.
  • the terminal U1 reports the above-mentioned power headroom to the network equipment and/or the terminal U2. In a possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 reports the above-mentioned power headroom to the network device through PUSCH or PUCCH. In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 reports the above-mentioned power headroom to the terminal U2 through PSSCH, PSCCH, PSDCH, PSBCH, or PSFCH. In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 reports the above-mentioned power headroom to the network device through PUSCH or PUCCH, and reports the above-mentioned power headroom to the terminal U2 through PSSCH, PSCCH, PSDCH, PSBCH, or PSFCH.
  • the terminal can determine the reported power headroom according to the power difference threshold, so that the reported power headroom is more accurate.
  • the method illustrated in FIG. 6 may be implemented in combination with the method illustrated in FIG. 3, that is, part 600 and part 610 in FIG. 6 may be executed in the method illustrated in FIG. 3. It can be understood that, in the method illustrated in FIG. 3, the execution order of the 600 part and the 610 part may be after the 320 part, but this application does not limit the execution order between the 300 and 310 parts and the 600 and 610 parts.
  • the terminal U1 determines the uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr In a possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL and the side link power P SL The uplink power headroom The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL , the side link power P SL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the uplink power headroom The following formula can be satisfied, where min ⁇ x,y ⁇ represents the smaller value of x and y:
  • the terminal U1 determines the uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL , the side link power P SL and the maximum uplink power P ULmax Among them, the maximum uplink power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the uplink power headroom The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the side link power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr In a possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the side link power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL and the side link power P SL The side link power headroom The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the side link power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL , the side link power P SL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the side link power headroom The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the side link power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL , the side link power P SL and the maximum side link power P SLmax Among them, the maximum side link power P SLmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the side link power headroom The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the minimum uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr
  • the minimum power headroom of the uplink It can be understood as the power headroom of the uplink when the side link uses the minimum power P SLmin .
  • the terminal U1 determines the uplink minimum power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the side link minimum power P SLmin and the uplink power P UL Among them, the side link minimum power P SLmin may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the uplink minimum power headroom The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the uplink minimum power margin according to the power difference threshold P thr , the side link minimum power P SLmin , the uplink power P UL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax the amount Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the minimum power P SLmin of the side link may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the uplink minimum power headroom The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the minimum uplink power according to the power difference threshold P thr , the minimum side link power P SLmin , the uplink power P UL and the maximum uplink power P ULmax margin Among them, the maximum uplink power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the minimum power P SLmin of the side link may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the uplink minimum power headroom The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the maximum uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr Maximum power headroom for this uplink It can be understood as the power headroom of the uplink when the side link uses the maximum power P SLmax .
  • the terminal U1 determines the uplink maximum power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the side link maximum power P SLmax and the uplink power P UL Wherein, the maximum power P SLmax of the side link may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the uplink maximum power headroom The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the uplink maximum power margin according to the power difference threshold P thr , the side link maximum power P SLmax , the uplink power P UL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax the amount Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2. The maximum side link power P SLmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the uplink maximum power headroom The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the maximum uplink power according to the power difference threshold P thr , the maximum side link power P SLmax , the uplink power P UL and the maximum uplink power P ULmax margin Among them, the maximum uplink power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The maximum side link power P SLmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the uplink maximum power headroom The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the minimum power headroom of the side link according to the power difference threshold P thr
  • the minimum power margin of the side link It can be understood as the power margin of the side link when the uplink uses the minimum power P ULmin .
  • the terminal U1 determines the side link minimum power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink minimum power P ULmin and the side link power P SL
  • the minimum uplink power P ULmin may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • the minimum power headroom of the side link The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the side link minimum power according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink minimum power P ULmin , the side link power P SL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax margin Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2. The minimum uplink power P ULmin may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The minimum power headroom of the side link The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the side link according to the power difference threshold P thr , the minimum uplink power P ULmin , the side link power P SL and the maximum side link power P SLmax Minimum power headroom Among them, the maximum side link power P SLmax may be predefined, or may be configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The minimum uplink power P ULmin may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The minimum power headroom of the side link The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the maximum power headroom of the side link according to the power difference threshold P thr
  • the maximum power margin of the side link It can be understood as the power headroom of the side link when the uplink uses the maximum power P ULmax .
  • the terminal U1 determines the side link maximum power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink maximum power P ULmax and the side link power P SL Among them, the uplink maximum power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2.
  • Maximum power margin of the side link The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the maximum side link power according to the power difference threshold P thr , the maximum uplink power P ULmax , the side link power P SL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax margin Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink maximum power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. Maximum power margin of the side link The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal U1 determines the side link according to the power difference threshold P thr , the maximum uplink power P ULmax , the side link power P SL and the maximum side link power P SLmax Maximum power headroom Among them, the maximum side link power P SLmax may be predefined, or may be configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink maximum power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. Maximum power margin of the side link The following formula can be satisfied:
  • the corresponding relationships shown in the above tables can be configured or pre-defined.
  • the value of the information in each table is only an example and can be configured to other values, which is not limited in this application.
  • it is not necessarily required to configure all the correspondences indicated in the tables.
  • the corresponding relationship shown in some rows may not be configured.
  • appropriate deformation adjustments can be made based on the above table, such as splitting, merging, and so on.
  • the names of the parameters indicated in the titles in the above tables may also adopt other names that the communication device can understand, and the values or expression modes of the parameters may also be other values or expression modes that the communication device understands.
  • other data structures can also be used, such as arrays, queues, containers, stacks, linear tables, pointers, linked lists, trees, graphs, structures, classes, heaps, hash tables, or hash tables. Wait.
  • the pre-definition in this application can be understood as definition, protocol definition, pre-definition, storage, pre-storage, pre-negotiation, pre-configuration, curing, or pre-burning.
  • the description of the relationship between a and b (which can also be understood as a functional relationship) involved in this application does not force a and b to accurately meet the relationship.
  • the value a'and the value b exactly satisfy the above relationship
  • the value a obtained by de-floating, rounding, or rounding the value a' can also be understood as a and b satisfying the above relationship.
  • a and b satisfying the relationship may also refer to a relationship in which a and b satisfy the relationship after equivalent modification, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of satisfying the relationship between a and b.
  • the mapping manner may be implemented through a formula, or the mapping manner may be implemented in the form of a table, or the mapping manner may also be implemented through It can be implemented in other ways, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the methods implemented by the communication device in the foregoing method embodiments may also be implemented by components (for example, integrated circuits, chips, etc.) that can be used for communication devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a corresponding communication device (also referred to as a communication device).
  • the communication device includes a corresponding communication device for executing each part of the foregoing embodiment.
  • Module can be software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device.
  • the communication device 700 may be the network device 10 or 20 in FIG. 1, or may be the terminal 11, 12, 21, or 22 in FIG.
  • the communication device may be used to implement the method corresponding to the communication device or node described in the foregoing method embodiment. For details, refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the communication device 700 may include one or more processors 701, and the processor 701 may also be referred to as a processing unit, which may implement certain control functions.
  • the processor 701 may be a general-purpose processor or a special-purpose processor. For example, it can be a baseband processor or a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data
  • the central processor can be used to control communication devices (such as base stations, baseband chips, DUs or CUs, etc.), execute software programs, and process data in the software programs.
  • the processor 701 may also store instructions and/or data 703, and the instructions and/or data 703 may be executed by the processor, so that the communication device 700 executes the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the method described in corresponds to the communication device.
  • the processor 701 may include a transceiver unit for implementing receiving and sending functions.
  • the transceiver unit may be a transceiver circuit or an interface.
  • the circuits or interfaces used to implement the receiving and sending functions can be separate or integrated.
  • the communication device 700 may include a circuit, and the circuit may implement the sending or receiving or communication function in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the communication device 700 may include one or more memories 702, on which instructions 704 may be stored, and the instructions may be executed on the processor, so that the communication device 700 executes the foregoing method implementation.
  • data may also be stored in the memory.
  • instructions and/or data may also be stored in the processor.
  • the processor and memory can be provided separately or integrated together.
  • the various correspondence relationships described in the foregoing method embodiments may be stored in a memory or in a processor.
  • the communication device 700 may further include a transceiver 705 and/or an antenna 706.
  • the processor 701 may be called a processing unit, and controls a communication device (terminal or network device).
  • the transceiver 705 may be called a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit or a transceiver, etc., and is used to implement the transceiver function of the communication device.
  • an apparatus 700 may include a processor 701 and a transceiver 705.
  • the processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold, and determines the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold.
  • the transceiver 705 transmits uplink data according to the uplink power, and transmits side uplink data according to the side link power.
  • the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is less than or equal to the power difference threshold.
  • the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that the When the transmission link is shared between the road and the side link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
  • the processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold according to a resource interval, where the resource interval is the resource of the uplink data and the resource of the sidelink data
  • the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource distance range where the resource distance is located.
  • the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and the transmission sub-carrier spacing, wherein the transmission sub-carrier spacing is the uplink data and the side link
  • the processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval.
  • the processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource interval and the reference resource interval, where the resource interval is the resource of the uplink data and the side-link The distance between the resources of the channel data, and the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance.
  • the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval and the transmission sub-carrier interval, wherein the transmission sub-carrier interval is a sub-carrier corresponding to the uplink data and the side-link data. Carrier spacing.
  • the processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource spacing, the reference resource spacing, and the transmission subcarrier spacing.
  • the processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource spacing, the reference resource spacing range, the transmission subcarrier spacing, and the reference subcarrier spacing, where the resource spacing is the uplink
  • the transmission subcarrier interval is the subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data
  • the power difference threshold It has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance range.
  • the transceiver 705 reports the power difference capability and/or the resource spacing capability to the network device.
  • the power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link.
  • the resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
  • the processor 701 determines the power headroom according to the power difference threshold, and the transceiver 705 reports the power headroom to the network device.
  • the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
  • an apparatus 700 may include a transceiver 705.
  • the transceiver 705 sends configuration information to the terminal, where the configuration information is used to configure the power difference threshold.
  • the transceiver 705 receives uplink data or side link data from the terminal, wherein the difference between the uplink power of the uplink data and the side link power of the side link data Less than or equal to the power difference threshold.
  • the device provided in the embodiment of the present application can enable the terminal to determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is less than the power difference threshold, so that the When the link and the side link share the transmission link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range where the resource spacing is located, wherein the resource spacing is the value of the uplink data The distance between the resource and the resource of the side link data.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and transmission subcarrier spacing, wherein the transmission subcarrier spacing is the uplink data The sub-carrier interval corresponding to the side link data.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval and transmission subcarrier interval, wherein the transmission subcarrier interval is the uplink data and the side The subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval range.
  • the transceiver 705 receives the power difference capability and/or the resource spacing capability from the terminal.
  • the power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link.
  • the resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
  • the transceiver 705 receives the power headroom from the terminal.
  • the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
  • the processor and transceiver described in this application can be implemented in integrated circuit (IC), analog IC, radio frequency integrated circuit RFIC, mixed signal IC, application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), printed circuit board ( printed circuit board, PCB), electronic equipment, etc.
  • the processor and transceiver can also be manufactured using various IC process technologies, such as complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), nMetal-oxide-semiconductor (NMOS), and P-type Metal oxide semiconductor (positive channel metal oxide semiconductor, PMOS), bipolar junction transistor (Bipolar Junction Transistor, BJT), bipolar CMOS (BiCMOS), silicon germanium (SiGe), gallium arsenide (GaAs), etc.
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • NMOS nMetal-oxide-semiconductor
  • PMOS bipolar junction transistor
  • BiCMOS bipolar CMOS
  • SiGe silicon germanium
  • GaAs gallium arsenide
  • the communication device is described by taking a network device or a terminal as an example, the scope of the communication device described in this application is not limited to this, and the structure of the communication device may not be limited by FIG. 5.
  • the communication device may be a stand-alone device or may be part of a larger device.
  • the device may be:
  • the IC collection may also include storage components for storing data and/or instructions;
  • ASIC such as modem (MSM)
  • FIG. 8 provides a schematic structural diagram of a terminal.
  • the terminal can be applied to the system shown in Figure 1.
  • FIG. 8 only shows the main components of the terminal.
  • the terminal 800 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire terminal, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signal and radio frequency signal and the processing of radio frequency signal.
  • the antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
  • the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, parse and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit processes the baseband signal to obtain a radio frequency signal and sends the radio frequency signal out in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. .
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, the radio frequency signal is further converted into a baseband signal, and the baseband signal is output to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and performs processing on the data. deal with.
  • FIG. 8 only shows a memory and a processor. In an actual terminal, there may be multiple processors and memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data.
  • the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal and execute software. Programs, which process the data of software programs.
  • the processor in FIG. 8 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors and are interconnected by technologies such as buses.
  • the terminal may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal may be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing the communication protocol and communication data can be built in the processor, or can be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
  • the antenna and control circuit with the transceiver function may be regarded as the transceiver unit 811 of the terminal 800, and the processor with the processing function may be regarded as the processing unit 812 of the terminal 800.
  • the terminal 800 includes a transceiver unit 811 and a processing unit 812.
  • the transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, and so on.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiving unit 811 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiving unit 811 can be regarded as the sending unit, that is, the transceiving unit 811 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc.
  • the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
  • the foregoing receiving unit and sending unit may be an integrated unit or multiple independent units.
  • the above-mentioned receiving unit and sending unit may be in one geographic location, or may be scattered in multiple geographic locations.
  • the communication device may be a terminal (for example, the terminal in the system shown in FIG. 1) or a component of the terminal (for example, an integrated circuit, a chip, etc.).
  • the communication device may also be a network device (for example, the communication device is a base station device that can be applied to the system of FIG. 1), or a component of the network device (for example, an integrated circuit, a chip, etc.).
  • the communication device may also be another communication module, which is used to implement the operation corresponding to the communication device or node in the method embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 900 may include: a processing module 902 (processing unit).
  • the communication device 900 may also include a transceiving module 901 (transceiving unit) and/or a storage module 903 (storing unit).
  • one or more modules as shown in Figure 9 may be implemented by one or more processors, or by one or more processors and memories; or by one or more processors It can be implemented with a transceiver; or implemented by one or more processors, memories, and transceivers, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor, memory, and transceiver can be set separately or integrated.
  • the communication device has the function of implementing the terminal described in the embodiment of this application.
  • the communication device includes the module or unit or means corresponding to the terminal to execute the steps described in the embodiment of this application.
  • the function or unit or means can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the communication device has the function of implementing the network equipment described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication device includes the modules or units or means corresponding to the steps involved in the network equipment described in the embodiments of the present application. ), the function or unit or means can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the function or unit or means can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • each module in the communication device 900 in the embodiment of the present application may be used to execute the method described in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, or FIG. 6 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • an apparatus 900 may include a transceiver module 901 and a processing module 902.
  • the processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold, and determines the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold.
  • the transceiver module 901 transmits uplink data according to the uplink power, and transmits side uplink data according to the side link power.
  • the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is less than or equal to the power difference threshold.
  • the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that the When the transmission link is shared between the road and the side link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
  • the processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold according to a resource interval, where the resource interval is the resource of the uplink data and the resource of the sidelink data
  • the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource distance range where the resource distance is located.
  • the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and the transmission sub-carrier spacing, wherein the transmission sub-carrier spacing is the uplink data and the side link
  • the processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval.
  • the processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold value according to the resource interval and the reference resource interval, where the resource interval is the resource of the uplink data and the side link The distance between the resources of the channel data, and the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance.
  • the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval and the transmission sub-carrier interval, wherein the transmission sub-carrier interval is a sub-carrier corresponding to the uplink data and the side-link data.
  • Carrier spacing the processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource spacing, the reference resource spacing, and the transmission subcarrier spacing.
  • the processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold value according to the resource interval, the reference resource interval range, the transmission subcarrier interval, and the reference subcarrier interval, where the resource interval is the uplink The distance between the resource of the link data and the resource of the side link data, the transmission subcarrier interval is the subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data, and the power difference threshold It has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance range.
  • the transceiver module 901 reports the power difference capability and/or the resource spacing capability to the network device.
  • the power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link.
  • the resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
  • the processing module 902 determines the power headroom according to the power difference threshold, and the transceiver module 901 reports the power headroom to the network device.
  • the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
  • a device 900 may include a transceiver module 901.
  • the transceiver module 901 sends configuration information to the terminal, where the configuration information is used to configure the power difference threshold.
  • the transceiver module 901 receives uplink data or side link data from the terminal, where the difference between the uplink power of the uplink data and the side link power of the side link data Less than or equal to the power difference threshold.
  • the device provided in the embodiment of the present application can enable the terminal to determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is less than the power difference threshold, so that the When the link and the side link share the transmission link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range where the resource spacing is located, where the resource spacing is the value of the uplink data.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and transmission subcarrier spacing, wherein the transmission subcarrier spacing is the uplink data The sub-carrier interval corresponding to the side link data.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval and transmission subcarrier interval, wherein the transmission subcarrier interval is the uplink data and the side The subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval range.
  • the transceiver module 901 receives the power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability from the terminal.
  • the power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link.
  • the resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
  • the transceiver module 901 receives the power headroom from the terminal.
  • the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
  • the technology described in this application can be implemented in various ways. For example, these technologies can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware.
  • the processing unit used to execute these technologies at a communication device can be implemented on one or more general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), digital Signal processing device (DSPD), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), programmable logic device (PLD), field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware component, or the above In any combination.
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • DSPD digital Signal processing device
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, and optionally, the general-purpose processor may also be any traditional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine.
  • the processor can also be implemented by a combination of computing devices, such as a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors combined with a digital signal processor core, or any other similar configuration achieve.
  • the steps of the method or algorithm described in the embodiments of the present application can be directly embedded in hardware, instructions executed by a processor, or a combination of the two.
  • the memory can be RAM memory, flash memory, ROM memory, EPROM memory, EEPROM memory, register, hard disk, removable disk, CD-ROM or any other storage medium in the art.
  • the memory can be connected to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the memory and can write information to the memory.
  • the memory can also be integrated into the processor.
  • the processor and the memory can be arranged in the ASIC, and the ASIC can be arranged in the terminal.
  • the processor and the memory may also be arranged in different components in the terminal.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data package.
  • the center transmits to another website, computer, server, or data packet center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data packet storage device such as a server or a data packet center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • SSD solid state disk

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in the present application are a communication method and apparatus. The method comprises: acquiring a power difference threshold; determining uplink power and sidelink power according to the power difference threshold; sending uplink data according to the uplink power; and sending sidelink data according to the sidelink power. According to the method and apparatus provided in the present application, concurrent transmission of uplink data and sidelink data can be realized when a sending link is shared, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.

Description

通信方法及装置Communication method and device
本申请要求于2019年3月28日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910244329.5、申请名称为“通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office with the application number 201910244329.5 and the application name "Communication Method and Device" on March 28, 2019, the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信的方法及装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.
背景技术Background technique
在无线通信网络中,终端可以向网络设备发送上行链路数据,终端也可以向另一终端发送侧行链路数据。对于一个终端,若发送上行链路数据和发送侧行链路数据共享发送链路(例如,共享射频单元),由于共享发送链路的指标约束,该终端在某次数据传输过程中,无法进行上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发。因此,如何在共享发送链路时使能上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高传输效率,成为亟需解决的问题。In a wireless communication network, a terminal can send uplink data to a network device, and a terminal can also send sidelink data to another terminal. For a terminal, if the sending uplink data and the sending side uplink data share a transmission link (for example, a shared radio frequency unit), due to the indicator constraints of the shared transmission link, the terminal cannot perform a certain data transmission process. Concurrency of uplink data and side link data. Therefore, how to enable the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data when the transmission link is shared, so as to improve the transmission efficiency, has become an urgent problem to be solved.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种数据收发的方法及装置。The embodiments of the present application provide a method and device for sending and receiving data.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端执行,包括:获得功率差阈值,根据所述功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,根据所述上行链路功率发送上行链路数据,以及根据所述侧行链路功率发送侧行链路数据。可选地,所述上行链路功率与所述侧行链路功率的差值小于或等于所述功率差阈值。In the first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which may be executed by a terminal, including: obtaining a power difference threshold, determining uplink power and side link power according to the power difference threshold, and The link power transmits uplink data, and the side link data is transmitted according to the side link power. Optionally, the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is less than or equal to the power difference threshold.
本申请实施例提供的方法中,终端可以依据功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,使得上行链路功率和侧行链路功率的差值小于该功率差阈值,从而在上行链路和侧行链路共享发送链路时克服指标约束,实现上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高传输效率。In the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that the When the link and the side link share the transmission link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实施方式中,根据资源间距获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围具有对应关系。可选地,所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围和传输子载波间隔具有对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,根据所述资源间距和所述传输子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the power difference threshold is obtained according to a resource interval, where the resource interval is the difference between the resources of the uplink data and the sidelink data The resource distance, the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource distance range where the resource distance is located. Optionally, the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and the transmission sub-carrier spacing, wherein the transmission sub-carrier spacing is the uplink data and the side link The subcarrier interval corresponding to the data obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实施方式中,根据资源间距和参考资源间距获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距具有对应关系。可选地,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距和传输子载波间隔具有对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,根据所述资源间距、所述参考资源间距、和所述传输子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the power difference threshold is obtained according to a resource interval and a reference resource interval, where the resource interval is the resource of the uplink data and the side row The distance between the resources of the link data, and the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance. Optionally, the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval and the transmission sub-carrier interval, wherein the transmission sub-carrier interval is a sub-carrier corresponding to the uplink data and the side-link data. Carrier spacing, obtaining the power difference threshold according to the resource spacing, the reference resource spacing, and the transmission subcarrier spacing.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实施方式中,根据资源间距、参考资源间距范围、传输子载波间隔和参考子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距范围具有对应关系。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the power difference threshold is obtained according to the resource spacing, the reference resource spacing range, the transmission subcarrier spacing, and the reference subcarrier spacing, where the resource spacing is the The distance between the resource of the uplink data and the resource of the side link data, the transmission subcarrier interval is the subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data, and the power difference The threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance range.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实施方式中,所述方法还包括:向网络设备上报功率差能力和/或资源间距能力。所述功率差能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大功率差值、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小功率差值、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的功率差值范围。所述资源间距能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大资源间距、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小资源间距、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的资源间距范围。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: reporting the power difference capability and/or the resource spacing capability to the network device. The power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link. The resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实施方式中,所述方法还包括:根据所述功率差阈值确定功率余量,以及向网络设备上报所述功率余量。可选地,所述功率余量包括上行链路功率余量和/或侧行链路功率余量。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: determining a power headroom according to the power difference threshold, and reporting the power headroom to a network device. Optionally, the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法可以由网络设备执行,包括:向终端发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置功率差阈值。接收来自所述终端的上行链路数据或侧行链路数据,其中,所述上行链路数据的上行链路功率与所述侧行链路数据的侧行链路功率的差值小于或等于所述功率差阈值。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which may be executed by a network device, and includes: sending configuration information to a terminal, where the configuration information is used to configure a power difference threshold. Receiving uplink data or side link data from the terminal, wherein the difference between the uplink power of the uplink data and the side link power of the side link data is less than or equal to The power difference threshold.
本申请实施例提供的方法中,可以使得终端依据功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,使得上行链路功率和侧行链路功率的差值小于该功率差阈值,从而在上行链路和侧行链路共享发送链路时克服指标约束,实现上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高传输效率。In the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that When the uplink and the side link share the transmission link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实施方式中,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与资源间距所在的资源间距范围的对应关系,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距。可选地,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围和传输子载波间隔的对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range where the resource spacing is located, wherein the resource spacing is the uplink The distance between the link data resource and the side link data resource. Optionally, the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and transmission subcarrier spacing, wherein the transmission subcarrier spacing is the uplink data The sub-carrier interval corresponding to the side link data.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实施方式中,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与参考资源间距的对应关系。可选地,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距和传输子载波间隔的对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval. Optionally, the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval and transmission subcarrier interval, wherein the transmission subcarrier interval is the uplink data and the side The subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实施方式中,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与参考资源间距范围的对应关系。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource spacing range.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实施方式中,所述方法还包括:接收来自所述终端的功率差能力和/或资源间距能力。所述功率差能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大功率差值、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小功率差值、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的功率差值范围。所述资源间距能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大资源间距、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小资源间距、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的资源间距范围。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: receiving a power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability from the terminal. The power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link. The resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实施方式中,所述方法还包括:接收来自所述终端的功率余量。可选地,所述功率余量包括上行链路功率余量和/或侧行链路功率余量。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the method further includes: receiving a power headroom from the terminal. Optionally, the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种装置,可以实现上述第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实施方式中的一项或多项的相应功能。所述装置包括用于执行上述方法的相应的单元或部件。所述装置包括的单元/模块可以通过软件和/或硬件方式实现。所述装置,例如可以为终端、或网络设备(如基站)、或者为可支持终端或网络设备实现上述功能的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等。In the third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a device that can implement one or more of the corresponding functions of the first aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect. The device includes corresponding units or components for performing the above methods. The units/modules included in the device can be implemented in software and/or hardware. The device may be, for example, a terminal, or a network device (such as a base station), or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that can support the terminal or network device to implement the above-mentioned functions.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种装置,可以实现上述第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实施方式中的一项或多项的相应功能。所述装置包括用于执行上述方法的相应的单元或部件。所述装置包括的单元/模块可以通过软件和/或硬件方式实现。所述装置,例如可以为终端、或网络设备(如基站)、或者为可支持终端或网络设备实现上述功能的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a device that can implement the corresponding functions of one or more of the foregoing second aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect. The device includes corresponding units or components for performing the above methods. The units/modules included in the device can be implemented in software and/or hardware. The device may be, for example, a terminal, or a network device (such as a base station), or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that can support the terminal or network device to implement the above-mentioned functions.
第五方面,本申请提供一种装置,包括:处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储程序或指令,当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时,使得该装置实现上述第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实施方式所述的方法。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides an apparatus including: a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a program or instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor, the The device implements the method described in the first aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
第六方面,本申请提供一种装置,包括:处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储程序或指令,当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时,使得该装置实现上述第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实施方式所述的方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a device, including: a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a program or instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor, the The device implements the method described in the foregoing second aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
第七方面,本申请提供一种存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序或指令,所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实施方式所述的方法。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a storage medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored. When the computer program or instruction is executed, the computer executes the first aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect. The method described.
第八方面,本申请提供一种存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序或指令,所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实施方式所述的方法。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a storage medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored. When the computer program or instruction is executed, the computer executes the above-mentioned second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect. The method described.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信系统,包括:上述第五方面所述的装置和上述第六方面所述的装置。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including: the device described in the fifth aspect and the device described in the sixth aspect.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为本申请提供的实施例应用的通信系统的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applied by an embodiment provided by this application;
图2示出了通信系统的一种架构举例示意图;Figure 2 shows a schematic diagram of an example architecture of a communication system;
图3示出了本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的交互示意图;FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4A示出了本申请实施例提供的一种资源间距示意图;FIG. 4A shows a schematic diagram of a resource spacing provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4B示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种资源间距示意图;FIG. 4B shows another schematic diagram of resource spacing provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4C示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种资源间距示意图;FIG. 4C shows another schematic diagram of resource spacing provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4D示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种资源间距示意图;FIG. 4D shows another schematic diagram of resource spacing provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4E示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种资源间距示意图;FIG. 4E shows another schematic diagram of resource spacing provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的交互示意图;FIG. 5 shows an interactive schematic diagram of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的交互示意图;Fig. 6 shows a schematic diagram of interaction of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种终端的结构示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided by an embodiment of this application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备示意图。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
具体实施方式detailed description
本申请实施例提供的通信方法及装置可以应用于通信系统中。如图1示出了一种通信系统结构示意图。该通信系统中包括一个或多个网络设备(清楚起见,图中示出网络设备10和网络设备20),以及与该一个或多个网络设备通信的一个或多个终端设备。图1中所示终端设备11和终端设备12与网络设备10通信,所示终端设备21和终端设备22与网络设备20通信。终端设备之间也可以进行通信,比如终端设备11可以与终端设备12进行通信,终端设备11可以与终端设备21进行通信,终端设备11可以与终端设备22进行通信。可选的,一个终端设备与另一个终端设备进行通信时,所述一个或多个终端设备可以不与网络设备进行通信。可以理解的是,网络设备和终端设备也可以被称为通信设备。The communication method and device provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to a communication system. Figure 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system structure. The communication system includes one or more network devices (for clarity, the figure shows the network device 10 and the network device 20), and one or more terminal devices that communicate with the one or more network devices. The terminal device 11 and the terminal device 12 shown in FIG. 1 communicate with the network device 10, and the terminal device 21 and the terminal device 22 shown in FIG. 1 communicate with the network device 20. The terminal devices can also communicate with each other. For example, the terminal device 11 can communicate with the terminal device 12, the terminal device 11 can communicate with the terminal device 21, and the terminal device 11 can communicate with the terminal device 22. Optionally, when one terminal device communicates with another terminal device, the one or more terminal devices may not communicate with the network device. It can be understood that network devices and terminal devices may also be referred to as communication devices.
本发明实施例描述的技术可用于各种通信系统,例如2G,3G,4G,4.5G,5G通信系统,多种通信系统融合的系统,或者未来演进网络。例如长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统,新空口(new radio,NR)系统,无线保真(wireless-fidelity,WiFi)系统,以及第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)相关的蜂窝系统等,以及其他此类通信系统。The technology described in the embodiments of the present invention can be used in various communication systems, such as 2G, 3G, 4G, 4.5G, 5G communication systems, systems where multiple communication systems are integrated, or future evolution networks. For example, long term evolution (LTE) system, new radio (NR) system, wireless fidelity (WiFi) system, and 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) related Cellular systems, etc., and other such communication systems.
图2示出了通信系统的一种可能的架构举例示意图,如图2所示无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备是集中单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布单元(distributed unit,DU)分离架构的基站(如gNodeB或gNB)。RAN可以与核心网相连(例如可以是LTE的核心网,也可以是5G的核心网等)。CU和DU可以理解为是对基站从逻辑功能角度的划分。CU和DU在物理上可以是分离的也可以部署在一起。多个DU可以共用一个CU。一个DU也可以连接多个CU(图中未示出)。CU和DU之间可以通过接口相连,例如可以是F1接口。CU和DU可以根据无线网络的协议层划分。例如分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层及无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层的功能设置在CU,而无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC),媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层,物理(physical)层等的功能设置在DU。可以理解对CU和DU处理功能按照这种协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例,也可以按照其他的方式进行划分。例如可以将CU或者DU划分为具有更多协议层的功能。例如,CU或DU还可以划分为具有协议层的部分处理功能。在一设计中,将RLC层的部分功能和RLC层以上的协议层的功能设置在CU,将RLC层的剩余功能和RLC层以下的协议层的功能设置在DU。在另一种设计中,还可以按照业务类型或者其他系统需求对CU或者DU的功能进行划分。例如按时延划分,将处理时间需要满足时延要求的功能设置在DU,不需要满足该时延要求的功能设置在CU。图2所示的网络架构可以应用于5G通信系统,其也可以与LTE系统共享一个或多个部件或资源。在另一种设计中,CU也可以具有核心网的一个或多个功能。一个或者多个CU可以集中设置,也分离设置。例如CU可以设置在网络侧方便集中管理。DU可以具有多个射频功能,也可以将射频功能拉远设置。Figure 2 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a possible architecture of a communication system. As shown in Figure 2, the network equipment in the radio access network (RAN) is a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (CU). unit, DU) A base station with a separate architecture (such as gNodeB or gNB). The RAN can be connected to a core network (for example, it can be an LTE core network, or a 5G core network, etc.). CU and DU can be understood as the division of base stations from the perspective of logical functions. CU and DU can be physically separated or deployed together. Multiple DUs can share one CU. One DU can also be connected to multiple CUs (not shown in the figure). The CU and DU can be connected through an interface, for example, an F1 interface. CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network. For example, the functions of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer and the radio resource control (RRC) layer are set in the CU, while the radio link control (RLC) and media access control The functions of the (media access control, MAC) layer and the physical layer are set in the DU. It can be understood that the division of CU and DU processing functions according to this protocol layer is only an example, and it can also be divided in other ways. For example, CU or DU can be divided into functions with more protocol layers. For example, the CU or DU can also be divided into part of the processing functions with the protocol layer. In a design, part of the functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer above the RLC layer are set in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer below the RLC layer are set in the DU. In another design, the functions of the CU or DU can also be divided according to business types or other system requirements. For example, it is divided by time delay, and functions whose processing time needs to meet the delay requirement are set in DU, and functions that do not need to meet the delay requirement are set in CU. The network architecture shown in FIG. 2 can be applied to a 5G communication system, and it can also share one or more components or resources with an LTE system. In another design, the CU may also have one or more functions of the core network. One or more CUs can be set centrally or separately. For example, the CU can be set on the network side to facilitate centralized management. The DU can have multiple radio frequency functions, or the radio frequency functions can be set remotely.
CU的功能可以由一个实体来实现,也可以进一步将控制面(CP)和用户面(UP)分 离,即CU的控制面(CU-CP)和用户面(CU-UP)可以由不同的功能实体来实现,所述CU-CP和CU-UP可以与DU相耦合,共同完成基站的功能。The function of the CU can be realized by one entity, or the control plane (CP) and the user plane (UP) can be further separated, that is, the control plane (CU-CP) and the user plane (CU-UP) of the CU can be composed of different functions It is realized by an entity, and the CU-CP and CU-UP can be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the function of the base station.
可以理解的是,本申请中提供的实施例也适用于CU和DU不分离的架构。It can be understood that the embodiments provided in this application are also applicable to an architecture where the CU and DU are not separated.
本申请中,网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。网络设备可以是接入网设备,接入网设备也可以称为无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)设备,是一种为终端设备提供无线通信功能的设备。网络设备包括但不限于:LTE中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB,evolutional Node B),NR中的基站(gNodeB或gNB)或收发点(transmission receiving point/transmission reception point,TRP),3GPP后续演进的基站,WiFi系统中的接入节点,无线中继节点,无线回传节点,网管设备等。基站可以是:宏基站,微基站,微微基站,小站,中继站,或,气球站等。多个基站可以支持上述提及的同一种技术的网络,也可以支持上述提及的不同技术的网络。基站可以包含一个或多个共站或非共站的TRP。网络设备还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器、CU,和/或,DU。网络设备还可以是服务器,可穿戴设备,或车载设备等。网络设备也可以是未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备。以下以网络设备为基站为例进行说明。所述多个网络设备可以为同一类型的基站,也可以为不同类型的基站。基站可以与终端设备进行通信,也可以通过中继站与终端设备进行通信。终端设备可以与不同技术的多个基站进行通信,例如,终端设备可以与支持LTE网络的基站通信,也可以与支持5G网络的基站通信,还可以支持与LTE网络的基站以及5G网络的基站的双连接。In this application, the network device can be any device with a wireless transceiver function. The network device may be an access network device, and the access network device may also be called a radio access network (RAN) device, which is a device that provides wireless communication functions for terminal devices. Network equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved base station in LTE (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B), base station in NR (gNodeB or gNB) or transmission receiving point/transmission reception point (TRP) , 3GPP subsequent evolution of base stations, access nodes in the WiFi system, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, network management equipment, etc. The base station can be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small station, a relay station, or a balloon station, etc. Multiple base stations can support networks of the same technology mentioned above, or networks of different technologies mentioned above. The base station can contain one or more co-site or non-co-site TRPs. The network device may also be a wireless controller, CU, and/or DU in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario. The network device can also be a server, a wearable device, or a vehicle-mounted device. The network device may also be a network device in a future 5G network or a network device in a future evolved PLMN network. The following description takes the network device as a base station as an example. The multiple network devices may be base stations of the same type, or base stations of different types. The base station can communicate with the terminal equipment, and it can also communicate with the terminal equipment through the relay station. A terminal device can communicate with multiple base stations of different technologies. For example, a terminal device can communicate with a base station that supports an LTE network, can also communicate with a base station that supports a 5G network, and can also support communication with a base station of an LTE network and a base station of a 5G network. Double connection.
本申请实施例中,用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备;也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统,该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。In the embodiments of the present application, the device used to implement the function of the network device may be a network device; it may also be a device capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device.
终端是一种具有无线收发功能的设备,可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持、穿戴或车载;也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。所述终端可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、车载终端设备、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、可穿戴终端设备等等。本申请的实施例对应用场景不做限定。终端有时也可以称为终端设备、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端设备、车载终端、工业控制终端、UE单元、UE站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端设备、移动设备、UE终端设备、终端设备、无线通信设备、UE代理或UE装置等。终端也可以是固定的或者移动的。A terminal is a device with a wireless transceiver function, which can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld, wearable or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on the water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons, etc.) And satellite class). The terminal may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, virtual reality (VR) terminal equipment, augmented reality (AR) terminal equipment, industrial control (industrial control) Wireless terminals in control), vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation safety (transportation safety) ), wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, wearable terminal devices, and so on. The embodiment of this application does not limit the application scenario. Terminals can sometimes be referred to as terminal equipment, user equipment (UE), access terminal equipment, vehicle-mounted terminal, industrial control terminal, UE unit, UE station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal equipment, mobile Equipment, UE terminal equipment, terminal equipment, wireless communication equipment, UE agent or UE device, etc. The terminal can also be fixed or mobile.
本申请实施例中,用于实现终端的功能的装置可以是终端;也可以是能够支持终端实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统,该装置可以被安装在终端中。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。In the embodiments of the present application, the device used to implement the function of the terminal may be a terminal; it may also be a device capable of supporting the terminal to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the terminal. In the embodiments of the present application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
在无线通信网络中,终端可以向网络设备发送上行链路(uplink,UL)数据,终端也可以向另一终端发送侧行链路(sidelink,SL)数据。对于一个终端,若发送上行链路数据和发送侧行链路数据共享发送链路(例如,共享射频单元,或者共享发送载波),由于 共享发送链路的指标约束,该终端在数据传输过程中,无法进行上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发。因此,如何在共享发送链路时使能上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高传输效率,成为亟需解决的问题。In a wireless communication network, a terminal can send uplink (UL) data to a network device, and a terminal can also send sidelink (SL) data to another terminal. For a terminal, if the uplink data and the transmission side uplink data share the transmission link (for example, share the radio frequency unit, or share the transmission carrier), due to the indicator constraints of the shared transmission link, the terminal is in the data transmission process , Concurrent uplink data and side-link data cannot be performed. Therefore, how to enable the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data when the transmission link is shared, so as to improve the transmission efficiency, has become an urgent problem to be solved.
发送链路(Tx chain),也可以称为基带链路、射频链路、传输链路或信道带宽等。可选的,发送链路可以包括射频处理的链路和/或基带处理的链路等。The transmission link (Tx chain) can also be called a baseband link, radio frequency link, transmission link, or channel bandwidth. Optionally, the transmission link may include a radio frequency processing link and/or a baseband processing link, etc.
终端设备可以支持多种发送链路。终端设备可以在一个链路上使用一个或多个发送链路发送信号。示例的,终端设备可支持在一个载波上,使用独立的发送链路发送上行信号和旁链路信号。例如,终端设备可支持在一个载波上,使用第一发送链路发送上行信号,使用第二发送链路发送旁链路信号。示例的,终端设备可支持在一个载波上,使用共享的发送链路发送上行信号和旁链路信号。例如,终端设备可支持在一个载波上,使用第三发送链路发送上行信号和旁链路信号,所述第三发送链路即为上述共享发送链路。The terminal device can support multiple transmission links. The terminal device can use one or more transmission links to send signals on a link. For example, the terminal device may support the use of independent transmission links to send uplink signals and side link signals on one carrier. For example, the terminal device may support on one carrier, using the first transmission link to send uplink signals, and the second transmission link to send side-link signals. For example, the terminal device may support the use of a shared transmission link to transmit uplink signals and side link signals on one carrier. For example, the terminal equipment may support using a third transmission link to transmit uplink signals and side link signals on one carrier, and the third transmission link is the aforementioned shared transmission link.
本申请实施例提供的方法中,终端可以依据功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,使得上行链路功率和侧行链路功率的差值小于该功率差阈值,从而在上行链路和侧行链路共享发送链路时克服指标约束,实现上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高传输效率。In the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that the When the link and the side link share the transmission link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
下面以具体实施例结合附图对本申请的技术方案进行详细说明。下述实施例和实施方式可以相互结合,对于相同或相似的概念或过程可能在某些实施例不再赘述。应理解,本申请中所解释的功能可以通过独立硬件电路、使用结合处理器/微处理器或通用计算机而运行的软件、使用专用集成电路,和/或使用一个或多个数字信号处理器来实现。当本申请描述为方法时,其还可以在计算机处理器和被耦合到处理器的存储器中实现。The technical solution of the present application will be described in detail below with specific embodiments in combination with the drawings. The following embodiments and implementation manners can be combined with each other, and the same or similar concepts or processes may not be repeated in some embodiments. It should be understood that the functions explained in this application can be implemented by independent hardware circuits, software running in combination with a processor/microprocessor or general-purpose computer, application-specific integrated circuits, and/or one or more digital signal processors. achieve. When this application describes a method, it can also be implemented in a computer processor and a memory coupled to the processor.
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的交互示意图。如图3所示,该实施例的方法可以包括:FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in Fig. 3, the method of this embodiment may include:
300部分:终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr确定上行链路功率P UL和侧行链路功率P SL。可选地,所述上行链路功率与所述侧行链路功率的差值(也可理解为所述上行链路功率与所述侧行链路功率的差值的绝对值)小于或等于所述功率差阈值(也可以表示为|P UL-P SL|≤P thr,其中|x|表示x的绝对值)。该功率差阈值可以理解为上行链路功率与侧行链路功率的最大差值。 Part 300: The terminal U1 determines the uplink power P UL and the side link power P SL according to the power difference threshold P thr . Optionally, the difference between the uplink power and the side link power (which can also be understood as the absolute value of the difference between the uplink power and the side link power) is less than or equal to The power difference threshold (also can be expressed as |P UL -P SL |≤P thr , where |x| represents the absolute value of x). The power difference threshold can be understood as the maximum difference between the uplink power and the side link power.
本申请实施例中的所述上行链路功率与所述侧行链路功率的差值,可以理解为所述上行链路功率与所述侧行链路功率在相同时域资源上的差值。本申请中的时域资源可以包含至少一个帧、至少一个子帧(sub-frame)、至少一个时隙(slot)、至少一个微时隙(mini-slot)、或者至少一个时域符号等。The difference between the uplink power and the side link power in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as the difference between the uplink power and the side link power on the same time domain resource . The time domain resources in the present application may include at least one frame, at least one sub-frame, at least one slot, at least one mini-slot, or at least one time domain symbol.
本申请实施例中的功率差阈值也可以是功率比值阈值,对应地,所述上行链路功率与所述侧行链路功率的差值也可以是所述上行链路功率与所述侧行链路功率的比值或所述侧行链路功率与所述上行链路功率的比值。为方便描述,本申请后续将以功率差阈值以及所述上行链路功率与所述侧行链路功率的差值为例进行描述。The power difference threshold in the embodiment of the present application may also be a power ratio threshold. Correspondingly, the difference between the uplink power and the side link power may also be the uplink power and the side link power. The ratio of link power or the ratio of the side link power to the uplink power. For the convenience of description, the application will describe the power difference threshold and the difference between the uplink power and the side link power as an example in the following.
310部分:终端U1根据所述上行链路功率P UL向网络设备发送上行链路数据,以及根据所述侧行链路功率P SL向终端U2发送侧行链路数据。对应地,网络设备接收来自终端U1的上行链路数据,终端U2接收来自终端U1的侧行链路数据。 Part 310: The terminal U1 sends uplink data to the network device according to the uplink power P UL , and sends side uplink data to the terminal U2 according to the side link power P SL . Correspondingly, the network device receives the uplink data from the terminal U1, and the terminal U2 receives the side link data from the terminal U1.
本申请实施例中的上行链路数据可以是上行物理信号,例如,该上行链路数据可以是上行的解调参考信号(demodulation reference signals,DM-RS)、上行的相位跟踪参考信号(phase-tracking reference signals,PT-RS)、或探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)。本申请实施例中的上行链路数据也可以是由上行物理信道承载的信息,例如,该上行链路数据可以是由物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)、物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)、或物理随机接入信道(physical random access channel,PRACH)承载的信息。本申请实施例中的上行链路数据还可以是上行物理信号和由上行物理信道承载的信息。The uplink data in the embodiments of the present application may be uplink physical signals. For example, the uplink data may be uplink demodulation reference signals (DM-RS), and uplink phase tracking reference signals (phase-tracking reference signals). tracking reference signals, PT-RS), or sounding reference signals (sounding reference signals, SRS). The uplink data in the embodiments of the present application may also be information carried by an uplink physical channel. For example, the uplink data may be information carried by a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) and a physical uplink control channel (physical uplink shared channel, PUSCH). Information carried by uplink control channel (PUCCH) or physical random access channel (physical random access channel, PRACH). The uplink data in the embodiments of the present application may also be uplink physical signals and information carried by uplink physical channels.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的上行链路数据可以指由终端发送由网络设备接收的数据。It can be understood that the uplink data in the embodiment of the present application may refer to data sent by a terminal and received by a network device.
本申请实施例中的侧行链路数据可以是侧行物理信号,例如,该侧行链路数据可以是侧行链路的DMRS、或侧行链路的同步信号。本申请实施例中的侧行链路数据也可以是由侧行物理信道承载的信息,例如,该侧行链路数据可以是由物理侧行链路共享信道(physical sidelink shared channel,PSSCH)、物理侧行链路控制信道(physical sidelink control channel,PSCCH)、物理侧行链路发现信道(physical sidelink discovery channel,PSDCH)、物理侧行链路广播信道(physical sidelink broadcast channel,PSBCH)、物理侧行链路反馈信道(physical sidelink feedback channel,PSFCH)、或物理侧行链路上行控制信道(physical sidelink uplink control channel,PSUCCH)承载的信息。本申请实施例中的侧行链路数据还可以是侧行物理信号,或由侧行物理信道承载的信息。The side link data in the embodiment of the present application may be a side link physical signal. For example, the side link data may be a side link DMRS or a side link synchronization signal. The side link data in the embodiments of the present application may also be information carried by a side link physical channel. For example, the side link data may be a physical side link shared channel (PSSCH), Physical sidelink control channel (PSCCH), physical sidelink discovery channel (PSDCH), physical sidelink broadcast channel (PSBCH), physical side Information carried by the physical sidelink feedback channel (PSFCH) or the physical sidelink uplink control channel (PSUCCH). The sideline link data in the embodiment of the present application may also be a sideline physical signal or information carried by a sideline physical channel.
比如侧行链路数据可以包括旁链路数据(SL data),和/或,旁链路控制信息(sidelinkcontrolinformation,SCI),所述SCI也可以称为旁链路调度分配(sidelinkschedulingassigment,SL SA)。SL SA是用于数据调度相关的信息,比如,用于承载PSSCH的资源分配和/或调制编码机制(modulation and coding scheme,MCS)等信息。侧行链路数据可以包括旁链路反馈控制信息(sidelink feedback control information,SFCI),旁链路反馈控制信息也可以简称为旁链路反馈信息。其中,旁链路反馈控制信息可以包括信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)和混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request,HARQ)等信息中的一个或多个。其中,HARQ信息中可以包括肯定应答(acknowledgement,ACK)或否定应答(negtive acknowledgement,NACK)等。For example, the side link data may include side link data (SL data), and/or side link control information (sidelink control information, SCI), and the SCI may also be referred to as sidelink scheduling assistance (sidelink scheduling assistance, SL SA) . SL SA is information related to data scheduling, such as resource allocation and/or modulation and coding scheme (MCS) information used to carry PSSCH. The sidelink data may include sidelink feedback control information (SFCI), and the sidelink feedback control information may also be referred to as sidelink feedback information for short. The side link feedback control information may include one or more of channel state information (channel state information, CSI), hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) and other information. Among them, the HARQ information may include an acknowledgement (acknowledgement, ACK) or a negative acknowledgement (negtive acknowledgement, NACK), etc.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的侧行链路数据可以指由终端发送由另一终端接收的数据。本申请实施例中的侧行链路(sidelink,SL)也可以被称为边链路、旁链路、或设备到设备(device to device,D2D)链路。It can be understood that the side link data in the embodiment of the present application may refer to data sent by a terminal and received by another terminal. The side link (SL) in the embodiment of the present application may also be called a side link, a side link, or a device to device (D2D) link.
通过上述方法,终端可以依据功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,使得上行链路功率和侧行链路功率的差值小于该功率差阈值,从而在上行链路和侧行链路共享发送链路时克服指标约束,实现上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高传输效率。Through the above method, the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that the When the link shares the transmission link, it overcomes the index constraint and realizes the concurrency of uplink data and side link data, thereby improving transmission efficiency.
可以理解,在上述300部分中,根据功率差阈值确定的上行链路功率可以为0(单位可以是瓦或毫瓦等用于表征功率的单位),则在上述310部分中,根据所述上行链路功率发送上行链路数据可理解为不发送该上行链路数据。It can be understood that in the above section 300, the uplink power determined according to the power difference threshold may be 0 (the unit may be a unit used to characterize power such as watts or milliwatts), then in the above section 310, according to the uplink power The link power sending uplink data can be understood as not sending the uplink data.
可以理解,在上述300部分中,根据功率差阈值确定的侧行链路功率可以为0(单位可以是瓦或毫瓦等用于表征功率的单位),则在上述310部分中,根据所述侧行链路功率发送侧行链路数据可理解为不发送该侧行链路数据。It can be understood that, in the above section 300, the side link power determined according to the power difference threshold can be 0 (the unit may be a unit used to characterize power such as watts or milliwatts), then in the above section 310, according to the The side-link power transmission of the side-link data can be understood as not sending the side-link data.
上述300部分中的上行链路功率P UL和侧行链路功率P SL,可理解为根据上述功率差阈值P thr以及调整前上行链路功率P′ UL和调整前侧行链路功率P′ SL确定的调整后上行链路功率P UL和调整后侧行链路功率P SL。上述调整前上行链路功率P′ UL和调整前侧行链路功率P′ SL可理解为未考虑上述功率差阈值P thr时获得的上行链路和侧行链路的功率。当P′ UL与P′ SL的差值大于P thr时(|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr),根据P thr、P′ UL和P′ SL确定上述P UL和P SL,其中,P UL与P SL的差值小于或等于P thr(|P UL-P SL|≤P thr);或者,当P′ UL与P′ SL的差值大于或等于P thr时(|P′ UL-P′ SL|≥P thr),根据P thr、P′ UL和P′ SL确定上述P UL和P SL,其中,P UL与P SL的差值小于P thr(|P UL-P SL|<P thr)。可以理解,上述P UL和P SL之和不超过终端的最大发送功率。 The uplink power P UL and the side link power P SL in the above section 300 can be understood as the power difference threshold P thr and the adjustment front uplink power P′ UL and the adjustment front side uplink power P′ The adjusted uplink power P UL and the adjusted rear uplink power P SL determined by SL . The foregoing pre-adjustment uplink power P′ UL and the foregoing adjustment front-side uplink power P′ SL can be understood as the uplink and side uplink power obtained without considering the power difference threshold P thr . When the difference P 'UL and P' SL is greater than P thr (| P 'UL -P ' SL |> P thr), according to P thr, P 'UL and P' SL and determining the UL above P P SL, wherein , The difference between P UL and P SL is less than or equal to P thr (|P UL -P SL |≤P thr ); or, when the difference between P′ UL and P′ SL is greater than or equal to P thr (|P′ UL -P 'SL | ≥P thr) , P thr, P the' UL and P 'SL and determining P UL P SL above, wherein the difference between P UL P SL is less than P thr (| P UL -P SL |<P thr ). It can be understood that the sum of the foregoing P UL and P SL does not exceed the maximum transmit power of the terminal.
在上述根据功率差阈值P thr以及调整前上行链路功率P′ UL和调整前侧行链路功率P′ SL确定调整后上行链路功率P UL和调整后侧行链路功率P SL的一种可能的实施方式中,减小P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值,保持P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值不变,获得调整后上行链路功率P UL和调整后侧行链路功率P SL,并满足P UL与P SL的差值小于或等于P thrIn the foregoing, one of the adjusted uplink power P UL and the adjusted rear uplink power P SL is determined according to the power difference threshold P thr , the adjusted front uplink power P′ UL and the adjusted front uplink power P′ SL . possible embodiment, the reduced value of the larger one of SL P 'UL and P', holding P 'UL and P' SL smaller value of a constant, to obtain the adjusted uplink The power P UL and the rear side uplink power P SL are adjusted to satisfy that the difference between P UL and P SL is less than or equal to P thr .
以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL>P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可以是:按照功率调整步长减小P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值(该例中较大一项为P′ SL),保持P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值不变(该例中较小一项为P′ UL)。根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL >P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: Adjust according to power Decrease the value of the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the larger one is P′ SL ), and keep the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the smaller item in this example is P′ UL ). P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000001
P UL=P′ UL P UL =P′ UL
且|P UL-P SL|≤P thr And |P UL -P SL |≤P thr
其中,N SL为正整数,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000002
表示SL功率调整步长,且
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000003
的取值可以为正实数或正整数,例如
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000004
可以是5、2、1.5、1、0.5、或0.25等取值。可以理解,上述公式
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000005
也可以是
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000006
对应地,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000007
的取值可以为负实数或负整数,例如
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000008
可以是-5、-2、-1.5、-1、-0.5、或-0.25等取值。
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000009
可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备通过高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置,还可以是由网络设备通过物理层信令(例如下行控制信息)指示的。
Among them, N SL is a positive integer,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000002
Represents the SL power adjustment step size, and
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000003
The value of can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000004
It can be 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25. Understandably, the above formula
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000005
can also be
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000006
Correspondingly,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000007
The value of can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000008
It can be -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25.
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000009
It may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or may be indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information).
仍以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL>P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可以是:按照功率调整量减小P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值(该例中较大一项为P′ SL),保持P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值不变(该例中较小一项为P′ UL)。根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Still taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL >P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: according to power Decrease the value of the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the larger one is P′ SL ), and keep the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the smaller item in this example is P′ UL ). P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
P SL=P′ SL-ΔP SL P SL =P′ SL -ΔP SL
P UL=P′ UL P UL =P′ UL
且|P UL-P SL|≤P thr And |P UL -P SL |≤P thr
其中,ΔP SL表示SL功率调整量,且ΔP SL的取值可以为正实数或正整数,例如ΔP SL可以是10、5、2、1.5、1、0.5、或0.25等取值。可以理解,上述公式P SL=P′ SL-ΔP SL也可以是P SL=P′ SL+ΔP SL,对应地,ΔP SL的取值可以为负实数或负整数,例如ΔP SL可以是-10、-5、-2、-1.5、-1、-0.5、或-0.25等取值。ΔP SL可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备通过高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置,还可以是由网络设备通过物理层信令(例如下行控制信息)指示的。 Wherein, ΔP SL represents the SL power adjustment amount, and the value of ΔP SL can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example, ΔP SL can be a value such as 10, 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25. It can be understood that the above formula P SL =P′ SL -ΔP SL may also be P SL =P′ SL +ΔP SL . Correspondingly, the value of ΔP SL may be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example, ΔP SL may be -10 , -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25, etc. ΔP SL may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information).
以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL<P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可 以是:按照功率调整步长减小P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值(该例中较大一项为P′ UL),保持P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值不变(该例中较小一项为P′ SL)。根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL <P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: Adjust according to power Decrease the value of the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the larger one is P′ UL ), and keep the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the smaller term in this example is P′ SL ). P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000010
P SL=P′ SL P SL =P′ SL
且|P UL-P SL|≤P thr And |P UL -P SL |≤P thr
其中,N UL为正整数,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000011
表示UL功率调整步长,且
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000012
的取值可以为正实数或正整数,例如
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000013
可以是5、2、1.5、1、0.5、或0.25等取值。可以理解,上述公式
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000015
也可以是
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000016
对应地,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000017
的取值可以为负实数或负整数,例如
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000018
可以是-5、-2、-1.5、-1、-0.5、或-0.25等取值。
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000019
可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备通过高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置,还可以是由网络设备通过物理层信令(例如下行控制信息)指示的。可以理解,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000020
与上述的
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000021
可以是同一个参数,也可以是不同的参数;
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000022
与上述的
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000023
可以通过同一个高层信令配置,也可以通过不同的高层信令配置;
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000024
与上述的
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000025
可以通过同一个物理层信令(比如同一个下行控制信息)指示,也可以通过不同的物理层信令(比如不同的下行控制信息)指示。
Among them, N UL is a positive integer,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000011
Represents the UL power adjustment step size, and
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000012
The value of can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000013
It can be 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25. Understandably, the above formula
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000015
can also be
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000016
Correspondingly,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000017
The value of can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000018
It can be -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25.
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000019
It may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or may be indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information). Understandable,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000020
With the above
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000021
It can be the same parameter or different parameters;
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000022
With the above
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000023
It can be configured through the same high-level signaling or through different high-level signaling;
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000024
With the above
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000025
It may be indicated by the same physical layer signaling (for example, the same downlink control information), or may be indicated by different physical layer signaling (for example, different downlink control information).
仍以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL<P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可以是:按照功率调整量减小P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值(该例中较大一项为P′ UL),保持P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值不变(该例中较小一项为P′ SL)。根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Still taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL <P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: according to power Reduce the value of the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL (the larger one is P′ UL in this example), and keep the value of the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL not Change (the smaller term in this example is P′ SL ). P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
P UL=P′ UL-ΔP UL P UL =P′ UL -ΔP UL
P SL=P′ SL P SL =P′ SL
且|P UL-P SL|≤P thr And |P UL -P SL |≤P thr
其中,ΔP UL表示UL功率调整量,且ΔP UL的取值可以为正实数或正整数,例如ΔP UL可以是10、5、2、1.5、1、0.5、或0.25等取值。可以理解,上述公式P UL=P′ UL-ΔP UL也可以是P UL=P′ UL+ΔP UL,对应地,ΔP UL的取值可以为负实数或负整数,例如ΔP UL可以是-10、-5、-2、-1.5、-1、-0.5、或-0.25等取值。ΔP UL可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备通过高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置,还可以是由网络设备通过物理层信令(例如下行控制信息)指示的。可以理解,ΔP UL与上述的ΔP SL可以是同一个参数,也可以是不同的参数;ΔP UL与上述的ΔP SL可以通过同一个高层信令配置,也可以通过不同的高层信令配置;ΔP UL与上述的ΔP SL可以通过同一个物理层信令(比如同一个下行控制信息)指示,也可以通过不同的物理层信令(比如不同的下行控制信息)指示。 Wherein, ΔP UL represents the UL power adjustment amount, and the value of ΔP UL can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example, ΔP UL can be a value such as 10, 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25. It can be understood that the above formula P UL =P' UL -ΔP UL can also be P UL =P' UL +ΔP UL . Correspondingly, the value of ΔP UL can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example, ΔP UL can be -10 , -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25, etc. ΔP UL may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (such as RRC signaling), or indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (such as downlink control information). It can be understood that ΔP UL and the above-mentioned ΔP SL can be the same parameter or different parameters; ΔP UL and the above-mentioned ΔP SL can be configured through the same high-level signaling, or through different high-level signaling; ΔP UL and the above-mentioned ΔP SL can be indicated by the same physical layer signaling (for example, the same downlink control information), or may be indicated by different physical layer signaling (for example, different downlink control information).
在上述根据功率差阈值P thr以及调整前上行链路功率P′ UL和调整前侧行链路功率P′ SL确定调整后上行链路功率P UL和调整后侧行链路功率P SL的另一种可能的实施方式中,增大P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值,保持P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值不变,获得调整后上行链路功率P UL和调整后侧行链路功率P SL,并满足P UL与P SL的差值小于或等于P thrIn the foregoing, the difference between the adjusted uplink power P UL and the adjusted rear uplink power P SL is determined based on the power difference threshold P thr , the adjusted front uplink power P′ UL and the adjusted front uplink power P′ SL . one possible embodiment, the increase in P 'and the UL P' is a value smaller SL, holding the value SL in a larger P 'and the UL P' unchanged, to obtain the adjusted uplink The road power P UL and the rear side uplink power P SL are adjusted to satisfy that the difference between P UL and P SL is less than or equal to P thr .
以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL>P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可以是:按照功率调整步长增大P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值(该例中较小一项为P′ UL),保持P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值不变(该例中较大一项为P′ SL)。根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL >P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: Adjust according to power Increase the step size of the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL (the smaller one is P′ UL in this example), and keep the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the larger term in this example is P′ SL ). P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000026
P SL=P′ SL P SL =P′ SL
且|P UL-P SL|≤P thr And |P UL -P SL |≤P thr
其中,N UL为正整数,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000027
表示UL功率调整步长,且
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000028
的取值可以为正实数或正整数,例如
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000029
可以是5、2、1.5、1、0.5、或0.25等取值。可以理解,上述公式
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000030
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000031
也可以是
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000032
对应地,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000033
的取值可以为负实数或负整数,例如
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000034
可以是-5、-2、-1.5、-1、-0.5、或-0.25等取值。
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000035
可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备通过高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置,还可以是由网络设备通过物理层信令(例如下行控制信息)指示的。
Among them, N UL is a positive integer,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000027
Represents the UL power adjustment step size, and
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000028
The value of can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000029
It can be 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25. Understandably, the above formula
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000030
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000031
can also be
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000032
Correspondingly,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000033
The value of can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000034
It can be -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25.
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000035
It may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or may be indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information).
仍以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL>P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可以是:按照功率调整量增大P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值(该例中较小一项为P′ UL),保持P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值不变(该例中较大一项为P′ SL)。根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Still taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL >P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: according to power Increase the value of the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the smaller one is P′ UL ), and keep the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the larger term in this example is P′ SL ). P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
P UL=P′ UL+ΔP UL P UL =P′ UL +ΔP UL
P SL=P′ SL P SL =P′ SL
且|P UL-P SL|≤P thr And |P UL -P SL |≤P thr
其中,ΔP UL表示UL功率调整量,且ΔP UL的取值可以为正实数或正整数。可以理解,上述公式P UL=P′ UL+ΔP UL也可以是P UL=P′ UL-ΔP UL,对应地,ΔP UL的取值可以为负实数或负整数。ΔP UL可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备通过高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置,还可以是由网络设备通过物理层信令(例如下行控制信息)指示的。 Among them, ΔP UL represents the UL power adjustment amount, and the value of ΔP UL can be a positive real number or a positive integer. It can be understood that the above formula P UL =P′ UL +ΔP UL may also be P UL =P′ UL -ΔP UL , and correspondingly, the value of ΔP UL may be a negative real number or a negative integer. ΔP UL may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (such as RRC signaling), or indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (such as downlink control information).
以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL<P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可以是:按照功率调整步长增大P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值(该例中较小一项为P′ SL),保持P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值不变(该例中较大一项为P′ UL)。根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL <P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: Adjust according to power Increase the step size of the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the smaller one is P′ SL ), and keep the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the larger item in this example is P′ UL ). P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000036
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000036
P UL=P′ UL P UL =P′ UL
且|P UL-P SL|≤P thr And |P UL -P SL |≤P thr
其中,N SL为正整数,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000037
表示SL功率调整步长,且
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000038
的取值可以为正实数或正整数,例如
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000039
可以是5、2、1.5、1、0.5、或0.25等取值。可以理解,上述公式
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000040
也可以是
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000041
对应地,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000042
的取值可以为负实数或负整数,例如
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000043
可以是-5、-2、-1.5、-1、-0.5、或-0.25等取值。
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000044
可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备通过高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置,还可以是由网络设备通过物理层信令(例如下行控制信息)指示的。
Among them, N SL is a positive integer,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000037
Represents the SL power adjustment step size, and
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000038
The value of can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000039
It can be 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25. Understandably, the above formula
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000040
can also be
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000041
Correspondingly,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000042
The value of can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000043
It can be -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25.
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000044
It may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or may be indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information).
仍以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL<P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可以是:按照功率调整量增大P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值(该例中较小一项为P′ SL),保持P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值不变(该例中较大一项为P′ UL)。根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Still taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL <P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: according to power Increase the value of the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL (in this example, the smaller one is P′ SL ), and keep the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL . Change (the larger item in this example is P′ UL ). P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
P SL=P′ SL+ΔP SL P SL =P′ SL +ΔP SL
P UL=P′ UL P UL =P′ UL
且|P UL-P SL|≤P thr And |P UL -P SL |≤P thr
其中,ΔP SL表示SL功率调整量,且ΔP SL的取值可以为正实数或正整数,例如ΔP SL可以是10、5、2、1.5、1、0.5、或0.25等取值。可以理解,上述公式P SL=P′ SL+ΔP SL也可以是P SL=P′ SL-ΔP SL,对应地,ΔP SL的取值可以为负实数或负整数,例如ΔP SL可以是-10、-5、-2、-1.5、-1、-0.5、或-0.25等取值。ΔP SL可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备通过高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置,还可以是由网络设备通过物理层信令(例如下行控制信息)指示的。 Wherein, ΔP SL represents the SL power adjustment amount, and the value of ΔP SL can be a positive real number or a positive integer, for example, ΔP SL can be a value such as 10, 5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25. It can be understood that the above formula P SL =P′ SL +ΔP SL can also be P SL =P′ SL -ΔP SL . Correspondingly, the value of ΔP SL can be a negative real number or a negative integer, for example, ΔP SL can be -10 , -5, -2, -1.5, -1, -0.5, or -0.25, etc. ΔP SL may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling), or indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (for example, downlink control information).
在上述根据功率差阈值P thr以及调整前上行链路功率P′ UL和调整前侧行链路功率P′ SL确定调整后上行链路功率P UL和调整后侧行链路功率P SL的另一种可能的实施方式中,减小P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值,增大P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值,获得调整后上行链路功率P UL和调整后侧行链路功率P SL,并满足P UL与P SL的差值小于或等于P thrIn the foregoing, the difference between the adjusted uplink power P UL and the adjusted rear uplink power P SL is determined based on the power difference threshold P thr , the adjusted front uplink power P′ UL and the adjusted front uplink power P′ SL . after a possible embodiment, the reduced value of P 'UL and P' SL larger one, increased P 'UL and P' SL smaller one of the values to obtain an uplink adjustment The power P UL and the rear side uplink power P SL are adjusted to satisfy that the difference between P UL and P SL is less than or equal to P thr .
以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL>P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可以是:将P′ SL与P′ UL的功率差超过功率差阈值P thr的功率(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)进行均分获得均分功率((|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)/2),并按照该均分功率减小P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值(该例中较大一项为P′ SL),增大P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值(该例中较小一项为P′ UL)。根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL >P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: The power difference between SL and P′ UL exceeds the power difference threshold P thr (|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr ) is divided equally to obtain the average power ((|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )/2), and reduce the value of the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL according to the divided power (the larger one in this example is P′ SL ), and increase P′ UL and P ′ The value of the smaller term in SL (the smaller term in this example is P′ UL ). P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
P SL=P′ SL-(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)/2 P SL =P′ SL -(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )/2
P UL=P′ UL+(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)/2 P UL =P′ UL +(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )/2
仍以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL>P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可以是:将P′ SL与P′ UL的功率差超过功率差阈值P thr的功率(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)按比例α进行分配获得比例分配功率((|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*α,和,(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*(1-α)),并按照该比例分配功率减小P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值(该例中较大一项为P′ SL),增大P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值(该例中较小一项为P′ UL)。根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Still taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL >P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: ′ The power difference between SL and P′ UL exceeds the power difference threshold P thr power (|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr ) is distributed proportionally α to obtain the proportional distribution power ((|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*α, and, (|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*(1-α)), and distribute the power according to the ratio to reduce the larger of P′ UL and P′ SL For the value of one item (the larger one in this example is P′ SL ), increase the value of the smaller one of P′ UL and P′ SL (the smaller one in this example is P′ UL ). P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
P SL=P′ SL-(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*α P SL =P′ SL -(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*α
P UL=P′ UL+(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*(1-α) P UL =P′ UL +(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*(1-α)
或者,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Or, P UL and P SL determined according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL may satisfy the following formula:
P SL=P′ SL-(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*(1-α) P SL =P′ SL -(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*(1-α)
P UL=P′ UL+(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*α P UL =P′ UL +(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*α
其中,α满足0≤α≤1。α可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备通过高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置,还可以是由网络设备通过物理层信令(例如下行控制信息)指示的。例如,α可以满足如下的一种:Among them, α satisfies 0≤α≤1. α may be predefined, or configured by the network device through high-level signaling (such as RRC signaling), or indicated by the network device through physical layer signaling (such as downlink control information). For example, α can satisfy one of the following:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000045
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000045
or
以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL<P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可以是:将P′ SL与P′ UL的功率差超过功率差阈值P thr的功率(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)进行均分获得均分功率((|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)/2),并按照该均分功率减小P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值(该例中较大一项为P′ UL),增大P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值(该例中较小一项为P′ SL)。根据P thr、 P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL <P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: The power difference between SL and P′ UL exceeds the power difference threshold P thr (|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr ) is divided equally to obtain the average power ((|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )/2), and reduce the value of the larger one of P′ UL and P′ SL according to the divided power (the larger one in this example is P′ UL ), and increase P′ UL and P The value of the smaller term in SL (the smaller term in this example is P'SL ). P UL and P SL determined according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
P SL=P′ SL+(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)/2 P SL = P′ SL +(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )/2
P UL=P′ UL-(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)/2 P UL =P′ UL -(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )/2
仍以|P′ UL-P′ SL|>P thr、并且P′ SL<P′ UL为例,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定P UL和P SL的过程可以是:将P′ SL与P′ UL的功率差超过功率差阈值P thr的功率(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)按比例α进行分配获得比例分配功率((|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*α,和,(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*(1-α)),并按照该比例分配功率减小P′ UL和P′ SL中较大一项的取值(该例中较大一项为P′ UL),增大P′ UL和P′ SL中较小一项的取值(该例中较小一项为P′ SL)。根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Still taking |P′ UL -P′ SL |>P thr and P′ SL <P′ UL as an example, the process of determining P UL and P SL according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can be: ′ The power difference between SL and P′ UL exceeds the power difference threshold P thr power (|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr ) is distributed proportionally α to obtain the proportional distribution power ((|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*α, and, (|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*(1-α)), and distribute the power according to the ratio to reduce the larger of P′ UL and P′ SL a value (in this example as a larger P 'UL), increased P' UL and P 'SL a smaller value (in this example as a smaller P' SL). P UL and P SL determined based on P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL can satisfy the following formula:
P SL=P′ SL+(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*α P SL =P′ SL +(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*α
P UL=P′ UL-(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*(1-α) P UL =P′ UL -(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*(1-α)
或者,根据P thr、P′ SL和P′ UL确定的P UL和P SL可满足下式: Or, P UL and P SL determined according to P thr , P′ SL and P′ UL may satisfy the following formula:
P SL=P′ SL+(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*(1-α) P SL =P′ SL +(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*(1-α)
P UL=P′ UL-(|P′ UL-P′ SL|-P thr)*α P UL =P′ UL -(|P′ UL -P′ SL |-P thr )*α
其中关于α的描述可参考之前对α的描述,此处不再赘述。For the description of α, please refer to the previous description of α, which will not be repeated here.
通过上述对上行链路功率和侧行链路功率的确定和调整,能够降低上行链路和侧行链路并发时的干扰,从而使能了上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高了传输效率。Through the above determination and adjustment of the uplink power and the side link power, the interference during the concurrency of the uplink and the side link can be reduced, thereby enabling the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data. In turn, the transmission efficiency is improved.
在本申请上述实施例中,可选地,终端U1还可以根据P UL与P′ UL相比的变化量或P SL与P′ SL相比的变化量确定是否进行上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发。 In this application the above-described embodiment, alternatively, the terminal may also determine whether U1 uplink data according to the line side and the P UL and P 'as compared to the amount of change of the UL or P SL and P' is compared to the amount of change SL Concurrency of link data.
在根据P UL与P′ UL相比的变化量确定是否发送上行链路数据的一种可能的实施方式中,P UL与P′ UL相比降低了x 1%,当x 1大于或等于门限值X 1时,终端U1将不发送上行链路数据。门限值X 1可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备配置的。 In the UL P and P 'determines whether to transmit uplink data amount of change compared to UL one possible embodiment, P UL and P' is reduced as compared UL x 1%, when x 1 is greater than or equal to the threshold When the limit is X 1 , the terminal U1 will not send uplink data. The threshold value X 1 may be predefined or configured by the network device.
在根据P UL与P′ UL相比的变化量确定是否发送上行链路数据的另一种可能的实施方式中,P UL与P′ UL相比增加了x 2%,当x 2大于或等于门限值X 2时,终端U1将不发送上行链路数据。门限值X 2可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备配置的。 In the UL P and P 'determines whether to transmit uplink data amount of change compared to UL another possible embodiment, P UL and P' UL increase compared x 2%, when x 2 is greater than or equal to When the threshold is X 2 , the terminal U1 will not send uplink data. The threshold X 2 may be predefined or configured by the network device.
在根据P SL与P′ SL相比的变化量确定是否发送侧行链路数据的一种可能的实施方式中,P SL与P′ SL相比降低了y 1%,当y 1大于或等于门限值Y 1时,终端U1将不发送侧行链路数据。门限值Y 1可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备配置的。 In the SL P and P 'side determines whether to transmit uplink data compared to the amount of change SL one possible embodiment, P SL and P' is reduced as compared SL y 1%, if y 1 is greater than or equal to When the threshold is Y 1 , the terminal U1 will not send side uplink data. The threshold Y 1 may be predefined or configured by the network device.
在根据P SL与P′ SL相比的变化量确定是否发送侧行链路数据的另一种可能的实施方式中,P SL与P′ SL相比增加了y 2%,当y 2大于或等于门限值Y 2时,终端U1将不发送侧行链路数据。门限值Y 2可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备配置的。 In the SL P and P 'side determines whether to transmit uplink data compared to the amount of change SL another possible embodiment, P SL and P' SL increase compared y 2%, or greater than when y 2 when the threshold value is equal to Y 2, a terminal U1 will not send downlink data side. The threshold Y 2 may be predefined or configured by the network device.
通过上述实施方式,可以根据调整后的上行链路功率和侧行链路功率确定是否进行上行链路和侧行链路的并发,从而保证了上行链路和侧行链路并发时的性能。Through the foregoing embodiments, it is possible to determine whether to perform uplink and side link concurrency according to the adjusted uplink power and side link power, thereby ensuring the performance of the uplink and side link concurrency.
在本申请上述实施例中,可选地,终端U1还可以根据路损参数(例如路损值)确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,所述路损参数为终端U1与网络设备之间的路损参数或终端U1与终端U2之间的路损参数。可选地,终端U1根据预定义的或是由网络设备配置的路损参数确定所述上行链路功率和所述侧行链路功率。通过该实施方式,可以在上行链路数据和侧行链路数据并发的情况下依据相同的路损参数,避免并发功率差异过大。In the foregoing embodiment of the present application, optionally, the terminal U1 may also determine the uplink power and the side link power according to path loss parameters (such as path loss values), where the path loss parameters are the difference between the terminal U1 and the network device. The path loss parameter between the terminal or the path loss parameter between the terminal U1 and the terminal U2. Optionally, the terminal U1 determines the uplink power and the side link power according to a predefined path loss parameter or configured by a network device. Through this implementation manner, it is possible to avoid excessive differences in concurrent power based on the same path loss parameter when the uplink data and the side uplink data are concurrent.
在本申请上述实施例中,可选地,终端U1还可以在上行链路数据和侧行链路数据并 发与非并发的情况下采用不同的路损参数确定上行链路功率和/或侧行链路功率。例如,终端U1在上行链路数据和侧行链路数据并发时使用终端U1与网络设备之间的路损参数确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,在上行链路数据和侧行链路数据非并发时(可理解为只发送上行链路数据或只发送侧行链路数据)使用终端U1与终端U2之间的路损参数确定上行链路功率或侧行链路功率。又例如,终端U1在上行链路数据和侧行链路数据并发时使用终端U1与终端U2之间的路损参数确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,在上行链路数据和侧行链路数据非并发时使用终端U1与网络设备之间的路损参数确定上行链路功率或侧行链路功率。In the above-mentioned embodiment of the present application, optionally, the terminal U1 may also use different path loss parameters to determine the uplink power and/or the side link when the uplink data and the side link data are concurrent and non-concurrent. Link power. For example, the terminal U1 uses the path loss parameter between the terminal U1 and the network device to determine the uplink power and the side link power when the uplink data and the side link data are concurrent. When the channel data is not concurrent (it can be understood as only sending uplink data or sending only side link data), the path loss parameter between the terminal U1 and the terminal U2 is used to determine the uplink power or the side link power. For another example, the terminal U1 uses the path loss parameter between the terminal U1 and the terminal U2 to determine the uplink power and the side link power when the uplink data and the side link data are concurrent. When the link data is not concurrent, the path loss parameter between the terminal U1 and the network device is used to determine the uplink power or the side link power.
结合图3,在本申请上述实施例中,可选地,该方法还可以包括320部分:终端U1获得功率差阈值P thr。该功率差阈值可以是预定义或预配置的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。 With reference to FIG. 3, in the above-mentioned embodiment of the present application, optionally, the method may further include part 320: the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr . The power difference threshold may be pre-defined or pre-configured, and may also be configured or instructed by the network device or other terminal.
在预定义或预配置所述功率差阈值的一种可选方式中,终端U1可获得协议中预定义的该功率差阈值。In an optional manner of pre-defining or pre-configuring the power difference threshold, the terminal U1 can obtain the power difference threshold predefined in the protocol.
在预定义或预配置所述功率差阈值的另一种可选方式中,终端U1可通过预配置参数获得该功率差阈值。例如,终端U1可通过用户识别模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)或通用用户识别(universal subscriber identity module,USIM)中的预配置参数获取上述功率差阈值。可以理解,SIM也可称为用户身份识别卡、智能卡等,USIM也可称为升级SIM等,预配置参数也可称为预配置信令、预配置信息等其他名称。In another optional manner of pre-defining or pre-configuring the power difference threshold, the terminal U1 may obtain the power difference threshold through pre-configuration parameters. For example, the terminal U1 may obtain the aforementioned power difference threshold through a pre-configured parameter in a subscriber identification module (SIM) or a universal subscriber identity module (USIM). It can be understood that the SIM may also be called a user identification card, a smart card, etc., the USIM may also be called an upgraded SIM, etc., and the pre-configuration parameters may also be called pre-configuration signaling, pre-configuration information and other names.
结合图3,在本申请上述实施例中,可选地,该方法还可以包括330部分:网络设备向终端U1发送配置信息,终端U1接收该配置信息,该配置信息用于配置或指示所述功率差阈值P thr。所述配置信息可以包括系统信息、由公共RRC信令承载的信息、由专用RRC信令承载的信息、或下行控制信息中的一种或多种。当所述配置信息包括多种信息时,终端U1可依据优先级规则确定所述功率差阈值P thr,其中所述优先级规则指定了多种信息间的优先级。通过多种信息,可实现更加灵活的功率差阈值配置,满足不同传输需求。 With reference to Figure 3, in the above-mentioned embodiment of the present application, optionally, the method may further include part 330: the network device sends configuration information to the terminal U1, and the terminal U1 receives the configuration information. The configuration information is used to configure or instruct the The power difference threshold P thr . The configuration information may include one or more of system information, information carried by public RRC signaling, information carried by dedicated RRC signaling, or downlink control information. When the configuration information includes multiple types of information, the terminal U1 may determine the power difference threshold P thr according to a priority rule, where the priority rule specifies a priority among multiple types of information. Through a variety of information, a more flexible power difference threshold configuration can be realized to meet different transmission requirements.
例如,上述优先级规则指定了下述优先级由高到低的信息:下行控制信息、由专用RRC信令承载的信息、由公共RRC信令承载的信息、系统信息、和预配置信息。该优先级规则也可以理解为,下行控制信息可覆写由专用RRC信令承载的信息、由公共RRC信令承载的信息、系统信息、或预配置信息,由专用RRC信令承载的信息可覆写由公共RRC信令承载的信息、系统信息、或预配置信息,由公共RRC信令承载的信息可覆写系统信息或预配置信息,系统信息可覆写预配置信息,其中覆写也可称为覆盖。依据上述示例的优先级规则,终端U1可以确定优先级更高的信息中配置或指示了所述功率差阈值P thrFor example, the above priority rule specifies the following information with priority from high to low: downlink control information, information carried by dedicated RRC signaling, information carried by public RRC signaling, system information, and pre-configuration information. The priority rule can also be understood as that downlink control information can overwrite information carried by dedicated RRC signaling, information carried by public RRC signaling, system information, or pre-configuration information, and information carried by dedicated RRC signaling can be Overwrite information, system information, or pre-configuration information carried by public RRC signaling. Information carried by public RRC signaling can overwrite system information or pre-configuration information. System information can overwrite pre-configuration information. Can be called coverage. According to the priority rule in the foregoing example, the terminal U1 may determine that the power difference threshold P thr is configured or indicated in the higher priority information.
可选地,330部分也可以是:终端U2向终端U1发送配置信息,终端U1接收该配置信息,该配置信息用于配置或指示所述功率差阈值P thr。例如,该配置信息可配置一个所述功率差阈值P thr,终端U1接收该配置信息可获得该功率差阈值P thrOptionally, part 330 may also be: the terminal U2 sends configuration information to the terminal U1, and the terminal U1 receives the configuration information, and the configuration information is used to configure or indicate the power difference threshold P thr . For example, the configuration information may configure a power difference threshold P thr , and the terminal U1 may receive the configuration information to obtain the power difference threshold P thr .
在上述320部分的另一种可选的实施方式中,终端U1根据索引、编号、或枚举参数获得所述功率差阈值P thr,其中,所述索引、编号、或枚举参数用于标识所述功率差阈值P thr,所述功率差阈值P thr与所述索引、编号、或枚举参数具有对应关系。该对应关系可以是预 定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。该索引、编号、或枚举参数可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。终端U1可获得上述索引、编号、或枚举参数,并依据功率差阈值P thr与所述索引、编号、或枚举参数具有的对应关系获得所述功率差阈值P thrIn another optional implementation manner of the above section 320, the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to an index, a number, or an enumeration parameter, where the index, a number, or an enumeration parameter is used to identify The power difference threshold P thr , and the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the index, number, or enumeration parameter. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal. The index, number, or enumeration parameter may be predefined, or may be configured or indicated by the network device or other terminal. The terminal U1 can obtain the aforementioned index, number, or enumeration parameter, and obtain the power difference threshold P thr according to the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold P thr and the index, number, or enumeration parameter.
在上述功率差阈值P thr与所述索引、编号、或枚举参数具有对应关系的一种可选的实施方式中,结合图3中的330部分,网络设备或终端U2向终端U1发送的配置信息可用于配置上述功率差阈值P thr与所述索引、编号、或枚举参数具有的对应关系。 In an optional implementation manner in which the aforementioned power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the index, number, or enumeration parameter, with reference to part 330 in FIG. 3, the configuration sent by the network device or terminal U2 to the terminal U1 The information can be used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold P thr and the index, number, or enumeration parameter.
例如,330部分中的配置信息可用于配置表1中示意的索引与功率差阈值的对应关系。结合表1的示例,网络设备或终端U2向终端U1发送的配置信息还可配置上述用于标识P thr的索引(也可理解为与P thr对应的索引)。例如,网络设备或终端U2向终端U1发送的配置信息配置了与
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000046
对应的索引“1”,终端U1则可以根据该索引“1”获得功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000047
根据该实施方式,能够以量化方式进行功率差阈值的配置,从而降低了功率差阈值的配置开销。
For example, the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the index and the power difference threshold shown in Table 1. With reference to the example in Table 1, the configuration information sent by the network device or the terminal U2 to the terminal U1 may also be configured with the aforementioned index for identifying P thr (which can also be understood as an index corresponding to P thr ). For example, the configuration information sent by the network device or terminal U2 to the terminal U1 is configured with
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000046
The corresponding index "1", the terminal U1 can obtain the power difference threshold according to the index "1"
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000047
According to this embodiment, the power difference threshold can be configured in a quantized manner, thereby reducing the configuration overhead of the power difference threshold.
在上述功率差阈值P thr与所述索引、编号、或枚举参数具有对应关系的另一种可选的实施方式中,所述对应关系是预定义的。结合表1的示例,该示例示意的索引与功率差阈值的对应关系可以是预定义的。 In another optional implementation manner in which the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the index, number, or enumeration parameter, the corresponding relationship is predefined. With reference to the example in Table 1, the corresponding relationship between the index and the power difference threshold illustrated in this example may be predefined.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000048
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000048
在上述320部分的另一种可选的实施方式中,终端U1根据资源间距Rt获得所述功率差阈值P thr,其中,所述资源间距Rt为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述功率差阈值P thr与所述资源间距Rt具有对应关系,或者,所述功率差阈值P thr与所述资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围具有对应关系。该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。可选地,所述资源间距Rt越大,与所述资源间距Rt具有对应关系的功率差阈值P thr也可以越大。可选地,不同的资源间距Rt也可对应相同的功率差阈值P thr。若功率差阈值P thr与资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围具有对应关系,终端U1可确定资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围,并依据功率差阈值P thr与资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围具有的对应关系获得所述功率差阈值P thrIn another optional implementation manner of the above section 320, the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource distance Rt, where the resource distance Rt is the resource of the uplink data and the side For the distance between the resources of the uplink data, the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the resource interval Rt, or the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal. Optionally, the larger the resource interval Rt, the larger the power difference threshold P thr corresponding to the resource interval Rt. Optionally, different resource spacing Rt may also correspond to the same power difference threshold P thr . If the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located, the terminal U1 can determine the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located, and according to the power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located The corresponding relationship obtains the power difference threshold P thr .
本申请中的间距范围可以理解为包括多种不同间距的集合。例如资源间距范围可理解为包括多种不同资源间距的集合。该间距范围也可以称为距离范围、间距区间、或距离区间等,本申请对此不做限定。The pitch range in this application can be understood as including a collection of multiple different pitches. For example, the resource spacing range can be understood as including a collection of multiple different resource spacings. The distance range may also be referred to as a distance range, a distance interval, or a distance interval, which is not limited in this application.
本申请中的上行链路数据的资源可以是为该上行链路数据分配的频域资源FU,也可以是包含该频域资源FU的频域资源集合。本申请中的侧行链路数据的资源可以是为该侧行链路数据分配的频域资源FS,也可以是包含该频域资源FS的频域资源集合。The uplink data resource in this application may be the frequency domain resource FU allocated for the uplink data, or may be a frequency domain resource set containing the frequency domain resource FU. The resource of side link data in this application may be a frequency domain resource FS allocated for the side link data, or may be a frequency domain resource set containing the frequency domain resource FS.
本申请中的频域资源或频域资源集合可以包含至少一个载波(carrier)、至少一个单元载波(componont carrier,CC)、至少一个带宽部分(bandwidth part,BWP)、至少一 个资源块组(resource block group,RBG)、至少一个物理资源块组(physical resource-block group,PRG)、至少一个资源块(resource block,RB)、或至少一个子载波(sub-carrier,SC)等。The frequency domain resource or frequency domain resource set in this application may include at least one carrier (carrier), at least one component carrier (CC), at least one bandwidth part (BWP), and at least one resource block group (resource). block group, RBG), at least one physical resource-block group (PRG), at least one resource block (resource block, RB), or at least one sub-carrier (sub-carrier, SC), etc.
上述BWP可包括上行链路BWP和侧行链路BWP。上行链路数据可以在上行链路BWP中传输,侧行链路数据可以在侧行链路BWP中传输。上行链路BWP和侧行链路BWP可以完全重叠、部分重叠、或者不重叠。The aforementioned BWP may include uplink BWP and side link BWP. Uplink data may be transmitted in the uplink BWP, and side link data may be transmitted in the side link BWP. The uplink BWP and the side link BWP may completely overlap, partially overlap, or not overlap.
上行链路BWP可以包含上行链路数据的资源,侧行链路BWP可以包含侧行链路数据的资源。上行链路数据的资源也可以理解为上行链路数据传输的资源,侧行链路数据的资源也可以理解为侧行链路数据传输的资源。The uplink BWP may include resources of uplink data, and the side link BWP may include resources of side link data. The resource of uplink data can also be understood as the resource of uplink data transmission, and the resource of side-link data can also be understood as the resource of side-link data transmission.
以图4A为例,本申请中的资源间距Rt可以是上行链路数据的资源中的起始频域资源与侧行链路数据的资源中的起始频域资源间的间距。或者,以图4B为例,本申请中的资源间距Rt可以是上行链路数据的资源中的结束频域资源与侧行链路数据的资源中的结束频域资源间的间距。或者,以图4C为例,本申请中的资源间距Rt可以是上行链路数据的资源中的起始频域资源与侧行链路数据的资源中的结束频域资源间的间距。或者,以图4D为例,本申请中的资源间距Rt可以是上行链路数据的资源中的结束频域资源与侧行链路数据的资源中的起始频域资源间的间距。或者,以图4E为例,本申请中的资源间距Rt可以是上行链路数据的资源中的中心频域资源与侧行链路数据的资源中的中心频域资源间的间距。Taking FIG. 4A as an example, the resource interval Rt in this application may be the interval between the starting frequency domain resource in the uplink data resource and the starting frequency domain resource in the side link data resource. Or, taking FIG. 4B as an example, the resource interval Rt in this application may be the interval between the end frequency domain resource in the uplink data resource and the end frequency domain resource in the side link data resource. Or, taking FIG. 4C as an example, the resource interval Rt in this application may be the interval between the start frequency domain resource in the uplink data resource and the end frequency domain resource in the side link data resource. Or, taking FIG. 4D as an example, the resource interval Rt in this application may be the interval between the end frequency domain resource in the uplink data resource and the start frequency domain resource in the side link data resource. Or, taking FIG. 4E as an example, the resource spacing Rt in this application may be the spacing between the center frequency domain resource in the uplink data resource and the center frequency domain resource in the side link data resource.
本申请中的资源间距Rt可采用资源数量(例如RB数量、RBG数量、或子载波数量等)表示,也可采用频率单位或带宽单位(例如兆(M)、或兆赫兹(MHz)等)表示。The resource spacing Rt in this application can be expressed by the number of resources (for example, the number of RBs, the number of RBGs, or the number of subcarriers, etc.), and can also be expressed in frequency units or bandwidth units (for example, megahertz (M) or megahertz (MHz), etc.) Said.
在上述功率差阈值P thr与所述资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围具有对应关系的一种可选的实施方式中,结合图3中的330部分,网络设备或终端U2向终端U1发送的配置信息可用于配置上述功率差阈值P thr与所述资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围具有的对应关系。 In an optional implementation manner in which the above-mentioned power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the resource interval range in which the resource interval Rt is located, with reference to part 330 in FIG. 3, the configuration sent by the network device or terminal U2 to the terminal U1 The information can be used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located.
例如,330部分中的配置信息可用于配置表2中示意的资源间距范围与功率差阈值的对应关系,表2中示意的R0、R1、R2和R3分别表示4种资源间距范围。所述资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围是R0、R1、R2和R3中的Rj(j为0、1、2或3),终端U1将获得与资源间距范围Rj对应的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000049
以R0、R1、R2、和R3表示的资源间距范围分别为小于或等于5M、大于5M且小于或等于10M、大于10M且小于或等于20M、和大于20M,以及Rt表示的资源间距为6M为例,由于6M属于大于5M且小于或等于10M的资源间距范围(即R1对应的资源间距范围),终端U1将获得与资源间距范围R1对应的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000050
根据该实施方式,能够依据不同链路的资源分布进行功率差阈值的确定,从而能够适应性地调整不同资源分布下的功率差阈值,提高资源的利用效率。
For example, the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the resource spacing range and the power difference threshold illustrated in Table 2. The R0, R1, R2, and R3 illustrated in Table 2 respectively represent four resource spacing ranges. The resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located is Rj among R0, R1, R2, and R3 (j is 0, 1, 2 or 3), and the terminal U1 will obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the resource interval range Rj
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000049
The resource spacing ranges represented by R0, R1, R2, and R3 are less than or equal to 5M, greater than 5M and less than or equal to 10M, greater than 10M and less than or equal to 20M, and greater than 20M, and the resource spacing represented by Rt is 6M. For example, because 6M belongs to a resource spacing range greater than 5M and less than or equal to 10M (that is, the resource spacing range corresponding to R1), the terminal U1 will obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the resource spacing range R1
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000050
According to this embodiment, the power difference threshold can be determined according to the resource distribution of different links, so that the power difference threshold under different resource distributions can be adjusted adaptively, and resource utilization efficiency can be improved.
在上述功率差阈值P thr与所述资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围具有对应关系的另一种可选的实施方式中,所述对应关系是预定义的。结合表2的示例,该示例示意的资源间距范围与功率差阈值的对应关系可以是预定义的。 In another optional implementation manner in which the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located, the corresponding relationship is predefined. With reference to the example in Table 2, the corresponding relationship between the resource spacing range and the power difference threshold illustrated in this example may be predefined.
表2Table 2
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000051
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000051
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000052
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000052
在上述320部分的另一种可选的实施方式中,终端U1根据资源间距Rt和传输子载波间隔St获得所述功率差阈值P thr,其中,所述资源间距Rt为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述传输子载波间隔St为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔。所述功率差阈值P thr与所述资源间距Rt和所述传输子载波间隔St具有对应关系,或者,所述功率差阈值P thr与所述资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围和所述传输子载波间隔St具有对应关系。该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。若所述功率差阈值P thr与所述资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围和所述传输子载波间隔St具有对应关系,终端U1可确定资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围以及传输子载波间隔St,并依据功率差阈值P thr与资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围、和所述传输子载波间隔St具有的对应关系获得所述功率差阈值P thrIn another optional implementation manner of the above section 320, the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt and the transmission subcarrier interval St, where the resource interval Rt is the uplink data The distance between the resource of and the resource of the side link data, and the transmission subcarrier interval St is the subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data. The power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the resource interval Rt and the transmission subcarrier interval St, or the resource interval range in which the power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval Rt are located and the transmission subcarrier interval The carrier interval St has a corresponding relationship. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal. If the power difference threshold P thr and the resource spacing range where the resource spacing Rt is located have a corresponding relationship with the transmission subcarrier spacing St, the terminal U1 can determine the resource spacing range where the resource spacing Rt is located and the transmission subcarrier spacing St, and based on the range of power resources pitch difference threshold P thr pitch Rt resource is located, and said transmission subcarrier having a correspondence relationship St obtaining the power difference threshold P thr interval.
可以理解,本申请中的传输子载波间隔也可以称为子载波间隔、系统参数、或帧结构参数(numerology)。本申请中的子载波间隔为进行数据传输时采用的一种传输参数(可理解为一种频域传输参数),例如子载波间隔可以为15kHz、30kHz、60kHz、120kHz、240kHz、或480kHz等。本申请中的上行链路数据对应的子载波间隔为进行上行链路数据传输时采用的子载波间隔,本申请中的侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔为进行侧行链路数据传输时采用的子载波间隔。It can be understood that the transmission subcarrier interval in this application may also be referred to as subcarrier interval, system parameter, or frame structure parameter (numerology). The subcarrier interval in this application is a transmission parameter (which can be understood as a frequency domain transmission parameter) used in data transmission. For example, the subcarrier interval may be 15kHz, 30kHz, 60kHz, 120kHz, 240kHz, or 480kHz. The sub-carrier interval corresponding to uplink data in this application is the sub-carrier interval used for uplink data transmission, and the sub-carrier interval corresponding to side-link data in this application is when side-link data transmission is performed. The subcarrier spacing used.
在上述功率差阈值P thr与所述资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围和所述传输子载波间隔St具有对应关系的一种可选的实施方式中,结合图3中的330部分,网络设备或终端U2向终端U1发送的配置信息可用于配置上述功率差阈值P thr与所述资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围和所述传输子载波间隔St具有的对应关系。 In an optional implementation manner in which the above-mentioned power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval range where the resource interval Rt is located have a corresponding relationship with the transmission sub-carrier interval St, in combination with part 330 in FIG. 3, the network device or The configuration information sent by the terminal U2 to the terminal U1 may be used to configure the correspondence between the resource interval range where the power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval Rt are located, and the transmission subcarrier interval St.
例如,330部分中的配置信息可用于配置表3中示意的传输子载波间隔、和资源间距范围与功率差阈值的对应关系,表3中示意的S0和S1分别表示两种传输子载波间隔,R00和R01分别表示与传输子载波间隔S0对应的两种资源间距范围,R10和R11分别表示与传输子载波间隔S1对应的两种资源间距范围。所述传输子载波间隔St是S0和S1中的Si(i为0或1),所述资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围是Ri0和Ri1中的Rij(j为0或1),终端U1将获得与资源间距范围Rij对应的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000053
(也可以理解成终端U1将获得在传输子载波间隔Si下与资源间距范围Rij对应的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000054
)。根据该实施方式,能够依据不同子载波间隔和不同链路的资源分布进行功率差阈值的确定,从而能够适应性地调整不同子载波间隔和不同资源分布下的功率差阈值,提高资源的利用效率。
For example, the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the transmission subcarrier spacing and the resource spacing range and the power difference threshold illustrated in Table 3. The S0 and S1 illustrated in Table 3 indicate two transmission subcarrier spacings, respectively. R00 and R01 respectively represent two resource spacing ranges corresponding to the transmission subcarrier spacing S0, and R10 and R11 respectively represent two resource spacing ranges corresponding to the transmission subcarrier spacing S1. The transmission subcarrier spacing St is Si in S0 and S1 (i is 0 or 1), the resource spacing range of the resource spacing Rt is Rij (j is 0 or 1) in Ri0 and Ri1, and the terminal U1 will Obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the resource spacing range Rij
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000053
(It can also be understood that the terminal U1 will obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the resource spacing range Rij under the transmission subcarrier spacing Si
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000054
). According to this embodiment, the power difference threshold can be determined according to the resource distribution of different subcarrier intervals and different links, so that the power difference threshold under different subcarrier intervals and different resource distributions can be adjusted adaptively, and resource utilization efficiency can be improved. .
在上述功率差阈值P thr与所述资源间距Rt所在的资源间距范围和所述传输子载波间隔St具有对应关系的一种可选的实施方式中,所述对应关系是预定义的。结合表3的示例,该示例示意的资源间距范围、和传输子载波间隔与功率差阈值的对应关系可以是预定义的。 In an optional implementation manner in which the power difference threshold P thr and the resource spacing range where the resource spacing Rt is located have a corresponding relationship with the transmission sub-carrier spacing St, the corresponding relationship is predefined. With reference to the example in Table 3, the resource spacing range illustrated in this example and the correspondence between the transmission subcarrier spacing and the power difference threshold may be predefined.
表3table 3
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000055
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000055
在上述320部分的另一种可选的实施方式中,终端U1根据资源间距Rt和参考资源间距Rr获得所述功率差阈值P thr,其中,所述资源间距Rt为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距Rr具有对应关系。该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。可以理解,本申请实施例中的参考资源间距可以理解为用于参考或作为基准的资源间距,根据该参考资源间距可以确定其他资源间距。参考资源间距对应的功率差阈值也可以称为参考功率差阈值,根据该参考功率差阈值可以确定其他资源间距对应的功率差阈值,或者根据该参考资源间距可以确定其他资源间距对应的功率差阈值。其中,参考功率差阈值可以是协议预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。 In another optional implementation manner of Part 320, the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt and the reference resource interval Rr, where the resource interval Rt is the value of the uplink data The distance between the resource and the resource of the side link data, and the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance Rr. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal. It can be understood that the reference resource distance in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as a resource distance used for reference or as a benchmark, and other resource distances can be determined according to the reference resource distance. The power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource interval may also be referred to as the reference power difference threshold. According to the reference power difference threshold, the power difference threshold corresponding to other resource intervals can be determined, or the power difference threshold corresponding to other resource intervals can be determined according to the reference resource interval. . Wherein, the reference power difference threshold may be predefined by the protocol, or may be configured or instructed by the network device or other terminal.
可选的,终端U1可以根据资源间距Rt,参考资源间距Rr,以及与参考资源间距Rr对应的参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000056
获得所述功率差阈值P thr。其中,所述资源间距Rt为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000057
与所述参考资源间距Rr具有对应关系,该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。所述功率差阈值P thr与资源间距Rt,参考资源间距Rr和参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000058
具有对应关系,该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。
Optionally, the terminal U1 may be based on the resource distance Rt, the reference resource distance Rr, and the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource distance Rr
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000056
The power difference threshold P thr is obtained . Wherein, the resource distance Rt is the distance between the resource of the uplink data and the resource of the side link data, and the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000057
It has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance Rr, and the corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal. The power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval Rr and the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000058
There is a corresponding relationship, and the corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
在上述参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000059
与所述参考资源间距Rr具有对应关系的一种可选的实施方式中,结合图3中的330部分,网络设备或终端U2向终端U1发送的配置信息可用于配置上述参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000060
与所述参考资源间距Rr具有的对应关系。
In the above reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000059
In an optional implementation manner that has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance Rr, in combination with part 330 in FIG. 3, the configuration information sent by the network device or the terminal U2 to the terminal U1 can be used to configure the reference power difference threshold.
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000060
Correspondence with the reference resource distance Rr.
例如,330部分中的配置信息可用于配置表4中示意的参考资源间距与参考功率差阈值的对应关系,表4中示意的Rr表示一种参考资源间距,
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000061
表示与Rr对应的参考功率差阈值。终端U1根据上述资源间距Rt和上述参考资源间距Rr,以及参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000062
获得的功率差阈值P thr可满足下式:
For example, the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the reference resource spacing and the reference power difference threshold illustrated in Table 4. Rr illustrated in Table 4 represents a reference resource spacing.
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000061
Indicates the reference power difference threshold corresponding to Rr. The terminal U1 is based on the aforementioned resource distance Rt and the aforementioned reference resource distance Rr, and the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000062
The obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000063
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000063
其中,C 0为整数或实数,log表示以2、自然常数e、或10为底的对数。或者,终端U1根据上述资源间距Rt和上述参考资源间距Rr,以及参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000064
获得的功率差阈值P thr可满足下式:
Among them, C 0 is an integer or a real number, and log represents a logarithm based on 2, the natural constant e, or 10. Alternatively, the terminal U1 is based on the above-mentioned resource distance Rt and the above-mentioned reference resource distance Rr, and the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000064
The obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000065
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000065
其中,C 1为整数或实数,m^表示以m为底的幂次方,其中m可以为整数(比如1,2,或10等)或自然常数e等。 Among them, C 1 is an integer or a real number, m^ represents a power with m as the base, where m can be an integer (such as 1, 2, or 10) or a natural constant e.
根据配置参考资源间距的方式,能够减少配置信息的内容,从而降低配置开销。According to the manner of configuring the reference resource spacing, the content of the configuration information can be reduced, thereby reducing the configuration overhead.
在上述参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000066
与所述参考资源间距Rr具有对应关系的另一种可选的实施方式中,所述对应关系是预定义的。结合表4的示例,该示例示意的参考资源间距与功 率差阈值的对应关系可以是预定义的。
In the above reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000066
In another optional implementation manner that has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance Rr, the corresponding relationship is predefined. With reference to the example in Table 4, the correspondence between the reference resource spacing and the power difference threshold illustrated in this example may be predefined.
表4Table 4
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000067
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000067
在上述320部分的另一种可选的实施方式中,终端U1根据资源间距Rt、参考资源间距Rrt和传输子载波间隔St获得所述功率差阈值P thr,其中,所述资源间距Rt为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述传输子载波间隔St为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,所述功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距Rrt和所述传输子载波间隔St具有对应关系。该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。 In another optional implementation manner of Part 320, the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval Rrt, and the transmission subcarrier interval St, where the resource interval Rt is The distance between the resources of the uplink data and the resources of the side link data, the transmission subcarrier interval St is the subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data, and The power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rrt and the transmission subcarrier interval St. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
可选的,终端U1可以根据资源间距Rt,参考资源间距Rrt,传输子载波间隔St,以及与参考资源间距Rrt和传输子载波间隔St对应的参考功率差阈值获得所述功率差阈值P thr。其中,所述资源间距Rt为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述传输子载波间隔St为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,所述功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距Rrt和所述传输子载波间隔St对应的参考功率差阈值具有对应关系,该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。所述参考功率差阈值与参考资源间距Rrt和所述传输子载波间隔St具有对应关系,该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。 Optionally, the terminal U1 may obtain the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval Rrt, the transmission subcarrier interval St, and the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource interval Rrt and the transmission subcarrier interval St. Wherein, the resource distance Rt is the distance between the resources of the uplink data and the resources of the side link data, and the transmission subcarrier interval St is the distance between the uplink data and the side link data. The subcarrier interval corresponding to the data, the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rrt and the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission subcarrier interval St. The corresponding relationship may be predefined or may be It is configured or instructed by network equipment or other terminals. The reference power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rrt and the transmission sub-carrier interval St. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or may be configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
在上述参考功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距Rrt和所述传输子载波间隔St具有对应关系的一种可选的实施方式中,结合图3中的330部分,网络设备或终端U2向终端U1发送的配置信息可用于配置上述参考功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距Rrt和所述传输子载波间隔St具有的对应关系。In an optional implementation manner in which the reference power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rrt and the transmission subcarrier interval St, with reference to part 330 in FIG. 3, the network device or the terminal U2 reports to the terminal U1 The sent configuration information may be used to configure the correspondence between the reference power difference threshold and the reference resource interval Rrt and the transmission subcarrier interval St.
例如,330部分中的配置信息可用于配置表5中示意的传输子载波间隔和参考资源间距与参考功率差阈值的对应关系,表5中示意的S0和S1分别表示两种传输子载波间隔,Rr0和Rr1分别表示与S0和S1对应的参考资源间距。所述传输子载波间隔St是S0和S1中的Si(i为0或1),所述参考资源间距Rrt是Rr0和Rr1中的Rri(i为0或1),终端U1根据上述资源间距Rt、参考资源间距Rri和传输子载波间隔Si对应的参考功率阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000068
获得的功率差阈值P thr可满足下式:
For example, the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the transmission subcarrier spacing and the reference resource spacing and the reference power difference threshold illustrated in Table 5. S0 and S1 illustrated in Table 5 indicate two transmission subcarrier spacings, respectively. Rr0 and Rr1 represent the reference resource intervals corresponding to S0 and S1, respectively. The transmission subcarrier interval St is Si in S0 and S1 (i is 0 or 1), the reference resource interval Rrt is Rri in Rr0 and Rr1 (i is 0 or 1), and the terminal U1 is based on the above resource interval Rt. , Reference resource spacing Rri and the reference power threshold corresponding to the transmission subcarrier spacing Si
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000068
The obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000069
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000069
其中,C 2为整数或实数,log表示以2、自然常数e、或10为底的对数。或者,终端U1根据上述资源间距Rt、参考资源间距Rri和传输子载波间隔Si对应的参考功率阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000070
获得的功率差阈值P thr可满足下式:
Among them, C 2 is an integer or a real number, and log represents a logarithm based on 2, the natural constant e, or 10. Alternatively, the terminal U1 is based on the reference power threshold corresponding to the foregoing resource interval Rt, reference resource interval Rri, and transmission subcarrier interval Si
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000070
The obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000071
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000071
其中,C 3为整数或实数,m^表示以m为底的幂次方,其中m可以为整数(比如1,2,或10等)或自然常数e等。 Among them, C 3 is an integer or a real number, m^ represents a power to the base m, where m can be an integer (such as 1, 2, or 10) or a natural constant e.
根据配置相应传输子载波间隔下参考资源间距的方式,能够减少配置信息的内容,从而降低配置开销。According to the manner of configuring the reference resource spacing under the corresponding transmission subcarrier spacing, the content of the configuration information can be reduced, thereby reducing the configuration overhead.
在上述参考功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距Rrt和所述传输子载波间隔St具有对应关系的另一种可选的实施方式中,所述对应关系是预定义的。结合表5的示例,该示例示意 的功率差阈值与参考资源间距和传输子载波间隔的对应关系为预定义的。In another optional implementation manner in which the reference power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rrt and the transmission subcarrier interval St, the corresponding relationship is predefined. With reference to the example in Table 5, the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval illustrated in this example is predefined.
表5table 5
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000072
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000072
在上述320部分的另一种可选的实施方式中,终端U1根据资源间距Rt、参考资源间距Rr、传输子载波间隔St和参考子载波间隔Sr获得所述功率差阈值P thrIn another optional implementation manner of part 320, the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval Rr, the transmission subcarrier interval St, and the reference subcarrier interval Sr.
其中,所述资源间距Rt为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述传输子载波间隔St为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,所述功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距Rr和参考子载波间隔Sr具有对应关系。该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。该对应关系可理解为是在上述参考子载波间隔Sr下的所述功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距Rr的对应关系,上述参考子载波间隔Sr可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。可以理解,本申请实施例中的参考子载波间隔可以理解为用于参考或作为基准的子载波间隔,根据该参考子载波间隔可以确定其他的子载波间隔下的资源间距,或者根据该子载波间隔可以确定其他的子载波间隔下的功率差阈值。本申请实施例中的参考资源间距可以理解为参考的资源间距,根据该参考资源间距可以确定其他的资源间距,或者根据该参考资源间距可以确定其他的资源间距对应的功率差阈值。其中,参考功率差阈值可以是协议预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。 Wherein, the resource distance Rt is the distance between the resources of the uplink data and the resources of the side link data, and the transmission subcarrier interval St is the distance between the uplink data and the side link data. For the subcarrier interval corresponding to the data, the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rr and the reference subcarrier interval Sr. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal. This correspondence can be understood as the correspondence between the power difference threshold P thr and the reference resource distance Rr under the reference subcarrier interval Sr. The reference subcarrier interval Sr may be predefined or determined by Configured or instructed by network equipment or other terminals. It can be understood that the reference subcarrier interval in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as a subcarrier interval used for reference or as a reference, and the resource interval under other subcarrier intervals can be determined according to the reference subcarrier interval, or according to the subcarrier interval The interval can determine the power difference threshold under other sub-carrier intervals. The reference resource distance in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as a reference resource distance, and other resource distances can be determined according to the reference resource distance, or the power difference threshold corresponding to other resource distances can be determined according to the reference resource distance. Wherein, the reference power difference threshold may be predefined by the protocol, or may be configured or instructed by the network device or other terminal.
可选的,终端U1可以根据资源间距Rt,传输子载波间隔St,参考子载波间隔Sr,参考资源间距Rr,以及参考资源间距Rr和参考子载波间隔Sr对应的参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000073
获得所述功率差阈值P thr。其中,所述资源间距Rt为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000074
与所述参考资源间距Rr和所述参考子载波间隔Sr具有对应关系,该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。所述功率差阈值P thr与资源间距Rt,传输子载波间隔St和参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000075
具有对应关系。该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。
Optionally, the terminal U1 may be based on the resource spacing Rt, the transmission subcarrier spacing St, the reference subcarrier spacing Sr, the reference resource spacing Rr, and the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource spacing Rr and the reference subcarrier spacing Sr
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000073
The power difference threshold P thr is obtained . Wherein, the resource distance Rt is the distance between the resource of the uplink data and the resource of the side link data, and the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000074
There is a correspondence with the reference resource interval Rr and the reference subcarrier interval Sr, and the correspondence may be predefined, or may be configured or indicated by a network device or other terminal. The power difference threshold P thr and the resource interval Rt, the transmission subcarrier interval St and the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000075
Have a corresponding relationship. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
在上述参考功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距Rr和参考子载波间隔Sr具有对应关系的一种可选的实施方式中,结合图3中的330部分,网络设备或终端U2向终端U1发送的配置信息可用于配置上述参考功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距Rr和所述参考子载波间隔Sr具有的对应关系。In an optional implementation manner in which the reference power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rr and the reference subcarrier interval Sr, with reference to part 330 in FIG. 3, the network device or the terminal U2 sends the information to the terminal U1 The configuration information may be used to configure the correspondence between the reference power difference threshold and the reference resource interval Rr and the reference subcarrier interval Sr.
例如,330部分中的配置信息可用于配置表6中示意的参考子载波间隔和参考资源间距与参考功率差阈值的对应关系,表6中示意的Sr表示参考子载波间隔,Rr表示参考资源间距。终端U1根据上述资源间距Rt、传输子载波间隔St、参考资源间距Rr和参考子载波间隔St对应的参考功率阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000076
获得的功率差阈值P thr可满足下式:
For example, the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the reference subcarrier spacing and reference resource spacing and the reference power difference threshold illustrated in Table 6. Sr illustrated in Table 6 represents the reference subcarrier spacing, and Rr represents the reference resource spacing. . The terminal U1 is based on the reference power threshold corresponding to the aforementioned resource spacing Rt, transmission subcarrier spacing St, reference resource spacing Rr, and reference subcarrier spacing St
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000076
The obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000077
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000077
其中,C 4为整数或实数,log表示以2、自然常数e、或10为底的对数。或者,终端U1根据上述资源间距Rt、传输子载波间隔St、参考资源间距Rr和参考子载波间隔Sr对应的参考功率阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000078
获得的功率差阈值P thr可满足下式:
Among them, C 4 is an integer or a real number, and log represents a logarithm based on 2, the natural constant e, or 10. Alternatively, the terminal U1 is based on the reference power threshold corresponding to the foregoing resource spacing Rt, transmission subcarrier spacing St, reference resource spacing Rr, and reference subcarrier spacing Sr
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000078
The obtained power difference threshold P thr can satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000079
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000079
其中,C 5为整数或实数,m^表示以m为底的幂次方,其中m可以为整数(比如1,2,或10等)或自然常数e等。 Among them, C 5 is an integer or a real number, m^ represents a power with m as the base, where m can be an integer (such as 1, 2, or 10) or a natural constant e.
根据配置相应参考子载波间隔下参考资源间距的方式,能够减少配置信息的内容,从而降低配置开销。According to the manner of configuring the reference resource spacing under the corresponding reference subcarrier interval, the content of the configuration information can be reduced, thereby reducing the configuration overhead.
在上述参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000080
与所述参考资源间距Rr和所述参考子载波间隔St具有对应关系的另一种可选的实施方式中,所述对应关系是预定义的。结合表6的示例,该示例示意的功率差阈值与参考资源间距和传输子载波间隔的对应关系为预定义的。
In the above reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000080
In another optional implementation manner that has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rr and the reference subcarrier interval St, the corresponding relationship is predefined. With reference to the example in Table 6, the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval illustrated in this example is predefined.
表6Table 6
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000081
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000081
在上述参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000082
与所述参考资源间距Rr和所述参考子载波间隔St具有对应关系的另一种可选的实施方式中,所述对应关系可以如表7所示。
In the above reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000082
In another optional implementation manner that has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval Rr and the reference subcarrier interval St, the corresponding relationship may be as shown in Table 7.
可选的,终端可以选择与资源间距Rt最接近的参考资源间距Rri(i取值为1,2,…,N)计算与资源间距Rt对应的功率差阈值。比如如果|2 Sr*Rri-2 St*Rt|的取值最小,则选择该参考资源间距Rri计算与资源间距Rt对应的功率差阈值。 Optionally, the terminal may select the reference resource interval Rri (i is 1, 2, ..., N) closest to the resource interval Rt to calculate the power difference threshold corresponding to the resource interval Rt. For example, if the value of |2 Sr *Rri-2 St *Rt| is the smallest, the reference resource interval Rri is selected to calculate the power difference threshold corresponding to the resource interval Rt.
表7Table 7
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000083
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000083
在上述传输子载波间隔St与上述参考子载波间隔Sr相同的情况下,终端U1可依据功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距Rr和参考功率差阈值具有的对应关系获得所述功率差阈值P thrIn the case where the transmission subcarrier interval St is the same as the reference subcarrier interval Sr, the terminal U1 may obtain the power difference threshold according to the correspondence between the power difference threshold P thr and the reference resource interval Rr and the reference power difference threshold. P thr .
在上述传输子载波间隔St与上述参考子载波间隔Sr不同的情况下,终端U1可依据传输子载波间隔St、以及参考子载波间隔Sr和参考资源间距Rr对应的参考功率差阈值确定在传输子载波间隔St下所述功率差阈值P thr与传输资源间距Rt具有对应关系,则终端U1可依据前述功率差阈值P thr与传输资源间距Rt、传输子载波间隔St、以及参考子载波间隔Sr和参考资源间距Rr具有的对应关系获得所述功率差阈值P thrIn the case where the aforementioned transmission subcarrier interval St is different from the aforementioned reference subcarrier interval Sr, the terminal U1 can determine the transmission subcarrier interval St, the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference subcarrier interval Sr and the reference resource interval Rr. The power difference threshold P thr and the transmission resource interval Rt under the carrier interval St have a corresponding relationship, and the terminal U1 can rely on the aforementioned power difference threshold P thr and the transmission resource interval Rt, the transmission subcarrier interval St, and the reference subcarrier interval Sr and The power difference threshold P thr is obtained by referring to the corresponding relationship of the resource interval Rr.
在上述320部分的另一种可选的实施方式中,终端U1根据资源间距Rt、参考资源间距范围Rrr、传输子载波间隔St和参考子载波间隔Sr获得所述功率差阈值P thr。其中,所述资源间距Rt为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述传输子载波间隔St为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,所述功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距范围Rrr具有对应关系。该对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。该对应关系可理解为是在上述参考子载波间隔Sr下的所述功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距范围Rrr的对应关系,上述参考子载波间隔Sr可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。可以理解,本申请实施例中的参考子载波间隔可以理解为用于参考或作为基准的子载波间隔,根据该参考 子载波间隔可以确定其他子载波间隔下的资源间距范围,或者根据该参考子载波间隔可以确定其他子载波间隔下的功率差阈值。本申请实施例中的参考资源间距范围可以理解为用于参考或作为基准的资源间距范围,根据该参考资源间距范围可以确定其他资源间距范围,或者根据该参考资源间距范围可以确定与其他资源间距范围对应的功率差阈值。 In another optional implementation manner of part 320, the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval range Rrr, the transmission subcarrier interval St, and the reference subcarrier interval Sr. Wherein, the resource distance Rt is the distance between the resources of the uplink data and the resources of the side link data, and the transmission subcarrier interval St is the distance between the uplink data and the side link data. For the subcarrier interval corresponding to the data, the power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval range Rrr. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal. This correspondence can be understood as the correspondence between the power difference threshold P thr and the reference resource spacing range Rrr under the reference subcarrier spacing Sr. The reference subcarrier spacing Sr may be predefined or may be Configured or instructed by network equipment or other terminals. It can be understood that the reference subcarrier interval in the embodiments of the present application can be understood as a subcarrier interval used for reference or as a reference, and the resource interval range under other subcarrier intervals can be determined according to the reference subcarrier interval, or according to the reference subcarrier interval. The carrier interval can determine the power difference threshold under other sub-carrier intervals. The reference resource spacing range in the embodiments of the present application can be understood as a resource spacing range used for reference or as a benchmark. According to the reference resource spacing range, other resource spacing ranges can be determined, or the reference resource spacing range can be used to determine the spacing from other resources. The power difference threshold corresponding to the range.
在上述传输子载波间隔St与上述参考子载波间隔Sr相同的情况下,上述参考资源间距范围Rrr包括上述资源间距Rt,则终端U1可依据功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距范围Rrr具有的对应关系获得所述功率差阈值P thrIn the case where the transmission subcarrier spacing St is the same as the reference subcarrier spacing Sr, and the reference resource spacing range Rrr includes the resource spacing Rt, the terminal U1 may have a power difference threshold P thr and the reference resource spacing range Rrr. To obtain the power difference threshold P thr .
在上述传输子载波间隔St与上述参考子载波间隔Sr不同的情况下,终端U1可依据传输子载波间隔St、参考子载波间隔Sr和参考资源间距范围Rrr确定在传输子载波间隔St下所述功率差阈值P thr与传输资源间距范围Rtr具有对应关系,并且所述传输资源间距范围Rtr包括上述资源间距Rt,则终端U1可依据前述功率差阈值P thr与传输资源间距范围Rtr具有的对应关系获得所述功率差阈值P thrIn the case that the transmission subcarrier interval St is different from the reference subcarrier interval Sr, the terminal U1 may determine the transmission subcarrier interval St according to the transmission subcarrier interval St, the reference subcarrier interval Sr, and the reference resource interval range Rrr. The power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the transmission resource interval range Rtr, and the transmission resource interval range Rtr includes the aforementioned resource interval Rt, then the terminal U1 can be based on the corresponding relationship between the aforementioned power difference threshold P thr and the transmission resource interval range Rtr The power difference threshold P thr is obtained .
根据上述实施方式,能够依据不同子载波间隔和不同链路的资源分布进行功率差阈值的确定,从而能够适应性地调整不同子载波间隔和不同资源分布下的功率差阈值,提高资源的利用效率。同时通过配置参考子载波间隔下参考资源间距范围的方式,能够减少配置信息的内容,从而降低配置开销。According to the above embodiment, the power difference threshold can be determined according to the resource distribution of different subcarrier intervals and different links, so that the power difference threshold under different subcarrier intervals and different resource distributions can be adjusted adaptively, and resource utilization efficiency can be improved. . At the same time, by configuring the reference resource spacing range under the reference subcarrier spacing, the content of the configuration information can be reduced, thereby reducing the configuration overhead.
在上述功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距范围Rrr具有对应关系的一种可选的实施方式中,结合图3中的330部分,网络设备或终端U2向终端U1发送的配置信息可用于配置上述功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距范围Rrr具有的对应关系。 In an optional implementation manner in which the aforementioned power difference threshold P thr has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource spacing range Rrr, with reference to part 330 in FIG. 3, the configuration information sent by the network device or the terminal U2 to the terminal U1 can be used for The corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold P thr and the reference resource distance range Rrr is configured.
例如,330部分中的配置信息可用于配置表8中示意的在参考子载波间隔Sr下的参考资源间距范围与功率差阈值的对应关系,表8中示意的Rrr0和Rrr1表示两种参考资源间距范围。For example, the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the reference resource spacing range and the power difference threshold under the reference subcarrier spacing Sr illustrated in Table 8. Rrr0 and Rrr1 illustrated in Table 8 indicate two reference resource spacings range.
在传输子载波间隔St与参考子载波间隔Sr相同的情况下,Rrr0和Rrr1中的参考资源间距范围Rrrj(j为0或1)包括上述资源间距Rt,终端U1将获得与参考资源间距范围Rrrj对应的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000084
When the transmission subcarrier interval St is the same as the reference subcarrier interval Sr, the reference resource interval range Rrrj (j is 0 or 1) in Rrr0 and Rrr1 includes the aforementioned resource interval Rt, and the terminal U1 will obtain the reference resource interval range Rrrj Corresponding power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000084
在传输子载波间隔St与参考子载波间隔Sr不同的情况下,终端U1可依据传输子载波间隔St、参考子载波间隔Sr、和参考资源间距范围Rrr0和Rrr1,确定在传输子载波间隔St下传输资源间距范围Rtr0和Rtr1与功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000085
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000086
具有如表9所示的对应关系。Rtr0和Rtr1中的传输资源间距范围Rtrj(j为0或1)包括上述资源间距Rt,终端U1将获得与传输资源间距范围Rtrj对应的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000087
In the case that the transmission subcarrier interval St is different from the reference subcarrier interval Sr, the terminal U1 can determine the transmission subcarrier interval St according to the transmission subcarrier interval St, the reference subcarrier interval Sr, and the reference resource interval ranges Rrr0 and Rrr1 Transmission resource spacing range Rtr0 and Rtr1 and power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000085
with
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000086
It has the corresponding relationship as shown in Table 9. The transmission resource spacing range Rtrj (j is 0 or 1) in Rtr0 and Rtr1 includes the above-mentioned resource spacing Rt, and the terminal U1 will obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission resource spacing range Rtrj
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000087
以参考资源间距范围Rrrj(j为0或1)为[Drrj_min,Drrj_max]、传输资源间距范围Rtrj(j为0或1)为[Dtrj_min,Dtrj_max]为例,其中,Drrj_min和Drrj_max分别表示参考资源间距范围Rrrj中参考资源间距的最小值和最大值,Dtrj_min和Dtrj_max分别表示传输资源间距范围Rtrj中传输资源间距的最小值和最大值。上述Dtrj_min和Dtrj_max可满足下式:Take the reference resource distance range Rrrj (j is 0 or 1) as [Drrj_min, Drrj_max], and the transmission resource distance range Rtrj (j is 0 or 1) as [Dtrj_min, Dtrj_max] as an example, where Drrj_min and Drrj_max represent reference resources The minimum and maximum values of the reference resource spacing in the spacing range Rrrj, Dtrj_min and Dtrj_max respectively represent the minimum and maximum values of the transmission resource spacing in the transmission resource spacing range Rtrj. The above Dtrj_min and Dtrj_max can satisfy the following formula:
Dtrj_min=Drrj_min*|Sr-St|,Dtrj_max=Drrj_max*|Sr-St|;或者,Dtrj_min=Drrj_min*|Sr-St|, Dtrj_max=Drrj_max*|Sr-St|; or,
Dtrj_min=Drrj_min÷|Sr-St|,Dtrj_max=Drrj_max÷|Sr-St|;或者,Dtrj_min=Drrj_min÷|Sr-St|, Dtrj_max=Drrj_max÷|Sr-St|; or,
Dtrj_min=Drrj_min*2 |Sr-St|,Dtrj_max=Drrj_max*2 |Sr-St|;或者, Dtrj_min=Drrj_min*2 |Sr-St| , Dtrj_max=Drrj_max*2 |Sr-St| ; or,
Dtrj_min=Drrj_min÷2 |Sr-St|,Dtrj_max=Drrj_max÷2 |Sr-St|Dtrj_min=Drrj_min÷2 |Sr-St| , Dtrj_max=Drrj_max÷2 |Sr-St| .
可以理解,上述Dtrj_min与Drrj_min以及Dtrj_max与Drrj_max的函数关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。It can be understood that the above-mentioned functional relationship between Dtrj_min and Drrj_min and between Dtrj_max and Drrj_max may be predefined, or may be configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
在上述功率差阈值P thr与所述参考资源间距范围Rrr具有对应关系的另一种可选的实施方式中,所述对应关系是预定义的。结合表8的示例,该示例示意的功率差阈值与参考资源间距范围的对应关系为预定义的。 In another optional implementation manner in which the power difference threshold P thr and the reference resource spacing range Rrr have a corresponding relationship, the corresponding relationship is predefined. With reference to the example in Table 8, the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource spacing range illustrated in this example is predefined.
表8Table 8
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000088
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000088
表9Table 9
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000089
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000089
在上述320部分的另一种可选的实施方式中,终端U1根据资源间距Rt、参考资源间距范围Rrr、传输子载波间隔St和参考子载波间隔Sr获得所述功率差阈值P thr。其中,参考资源间距范围Rrr和参考子载波间隔Sr对应参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000090
在上述参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000091
与所述参考资源间距范围Rrr和参考子载波间隔Sr具有对应关系的一种可选的实施方式中,结合图3中的330部分,网络设备或终端U2向终端U1发送的配置信息可用于配置上述功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000092
与所述参考资源间距范围Rrr和参考子载波间隔Sr具有的对应关系。
In another optional implementation manner of part 320, the terminal U1 obtains the power difference threshold P thr according to the resource interval Rt, the reference resource interval range Rrr, the transmission subcarrier interval St, and the reference subcarrier interval Sr. Among them, the reference resource spacing range Rrr and the reference subcarrier spacing Sr correspond to the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000090
In the above reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000091
In an optional implementation manner that has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource spacing range Rrr and the reference subcarrier spacing Sr, in conjunction with part 330 in FIG. 3, the configuration information sent by the network device or the terminal U2 to the terminal U1 can be used for configuration The above power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000092
Correspondence with the reference resource spacing range Rrr and the reference subcarrier spacing Sr.
例如,330部分中的配置信息可用于配置表10中示意的在参考子载波间隔Sr下的参考资源间距范围与功率差阈值的对应关系,表10中示意的Rrr表示参考资源间距范围,Sr表示参考子载波间隔。For example, the configuration information in section 330 can be used to configure the correspondence between the reference resource interval range and the power difference threshold under the reference subcarrier interval Sr illustrated in Table 10. Rrr illustrated in Table 10 represents the reference resource interval range, and Sr represents Reference subcarrier spacing.
可选的,根据参考资源间距范围以及参考功率差阈值的对应关系,可以得到其他的一个或多个参考资源间距范围以及其他的一个或多个参考资源间距范围对应的一个或多个参考功率差阈值。比如,可以根据如下的方式确定。Optionally, according to the correspondence between the reference resource spacing range and the reference power difference threshold, one or more other reference resource spacing ranges and one or more reference power differences corresponding to the other one or more reference resource spacing ranges can be obtained Threshold. For example, it can be determined as follows.
以参考资源间距范围Rrr为[Rrr_min,Rrr_max],其中,Rrr_min和Rrr_max分别表示参考资源间距范围Rrr中参考资源间距的最小值和最大值。根据参考资源间距范围可以确定一个或多个额外的参考资源间距范围,比如额外的参考资源间距范围为Rrri为[Rrri_min,Rrri_max],其中i可以取值为0,1,…,N。Let the reference resource distance range Rrr be [Rrr_min, Rrr_max], where Rrr_min and Rrr_max represent the minimum and maximum value of the reference resource distance in the reference resource distance range Rrr. One or more additional reference resource distance ranges can be determined according to the reference resource distance range. For example, the additional reference resource distance range is [Rrri_min, Rrri_max], where i can take values of 0, 1, ..., N.
其中,上述Rrri_min和Rrri_max可满足下式:Among them, the above Rrri_min and Rrri_max can satisfy the following formula:
Rrri_min=Rrr_max+i*(Rrr_max-Rrr_min),Rrri_max=Rrr_max+(i+1)*(Rrr_max-Rrr_min);或者,Rrri_min=Rrr_max+i*(Rrr_max-Rrr_min), Rrri_max=Rrr_max+(i+1)*(Rrr_max-Rrr_min); or,
Rrri_max=Rrr_min-i*(Rrr_max-Rrr_max),Rrri_min=Rrr_min-(i+1)*(Rrr_max-Rrr_max);。Rrri_max=Rrr_min-i*(Rrr_max-Rrr_max), Rrri_min=Rrr_min-(i+1)*(Rrr_max-Rrr_max);
可以理解,上述Rrri_min与Rrr_max和Rrr_min的函数关系,以及Rrri_max与Rrr_max和Rrr_min的函数关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。It can be understood that the above-mentioned functional relationship between Rrri_min and Rrr_max and Rrr_min, and the functional relationship between Rrri_max and Rrr_max and Rrr_min may be predefined, or may be configured or indicated by a network device or other terminal.
另外,参考资源间距范围Rrri对应的参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000093
可以根据参考资源间距范 围Rrr以及参考功率阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000094
确定,所述参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000095
与参考资源间距范围Rrri、参考资源间距范围Rrr以及参考功率阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000096
具有对应关系。所述对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。其中,i可以取值为0,1,…,N。其中,N为正整数。
In addition, the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource spacing range Rrri
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000093
Can be based on the reference resource spacing range Rrr and the reference power threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000094
Determine that the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000095
Distance from reference resource range Rrri, reference resource distance range Rrr, and reference power threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000096
Have a corresponding relationship. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or indicated by a network device or other terminal. Among them, i can take the value 0, 1, ..., N. Among them, N is a positive integer.
比如,终端U1根据上述参考资源间距范围Rrri和上述参考资源间距范围Rrr,以及参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000097
获得的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000098
可满足下式:
For example, the terminal U1 is based on the reference resource distance range Rrri and the reference resource distance range Rrr, and the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000097
Obtained power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000098
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000099
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000099
其中,C 6为整数或实数,log表示以2、自然常数e、或10为底的对数。或者,终端U1根据上述参考资源间距范围Rrri和上述参考资源间距范围Rrr,以及参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000100
获得的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000101
可满足下式:
Among them, C 6 is an integer or a real number, and log represents a logarithm based on 2, the natural constant e, or 10. Alternatively, the terminal U1 is based on the reference resource distance range Rrri and the reference resource distance range Rrr, and the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000100
Obtained power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000101
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000102
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000102
其中,C 7为整数或实数,m^表示以m为底的幂次方,其中m可以为整数(比如1,2,或10等)或自然常数e等。 Among them, C 7 is an integer or a real number, m^ represents a power with m as the base, where m can be an integer (such as 1, 2, or 10) or a natural constant e.
另外,参考资源间距范围Rrri对应的参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000103
可以根据参考功率阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000104
确定,所述参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000105
与参考功率阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000106
具有对应关系。所述对应关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。其中,i可以取值为0,1,…,N。其中,N为正整数。
In addition, the reference power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource spacing range Rrri
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000103
Can be based on the reference power threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000104
Determine that the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000105
With reference power threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000106
Have a corresponding relationship. The corresponding relationship may be predefined, or configured or indicated by a network device or other terminal. Among them, i can take the value 0, 1, ..., N. Among them, N is a positive integer.
比如,终端U1根据上述参考资源间距范围Rrri和上述参考资源间距范围Rrr,以及参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000107
获得的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000108
可满足下式:
For example, the terminal U1 is based on the reference resource distance range Rrri and the reference resource distance range Rrr, and the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000107
Obtained power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000108
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000109
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000109
其中,C 8为整数或实数。或者,终端U1根据上述参考资源间距范围Rrri和上述参考资源间距范围Rrr,以及参考功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000110
获得的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000111
可满足下式:
Among them, C 8 is an integer or a real number. Alternatively, the terminal U1 is based on the reference resource distance range Rrri and the reference resource distance range Rrr, and the reference power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000110
Obtained power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000111
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000112
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000112
其中,C 9为整数或实数。 Among them, C 9 is an integer or a real number.
可选的,通过参考资源间距范围以及参考功率差阈值的对应关系(如表10所示),可以得到如下表11中的内容,即根据一个参考资源间距以及对应一个参考功率差阈值可以确定一个或多个参考资源间距以及对应的一个或多个参考功率差阈值。具体可以参考上述方式,或者,也可以采用其他方式,具体的,本申请对此不做限定。Optionally, through the corresponding relationship between the reference resource spacing range and the reference power difference threshold (as shown in Table 10), the content in Table 11 below can be obtained, that is, one can be determined according to a reference resource spacing and a corresponding reference power difference threshold. Or multiple reference resource intervals and corresponding one or more reference power difference thresholds. For details, reference may be made to the above manner, or other manners may also be adopted, and specifically, this application does not limit this.
根据配置参考资源间距范围的方式,能够减少配置信息的内容,从而降低配置开销。According to the manner of configuring the reference resource interval range, the content of the configuration information can be reduced, thereby reducing the configuration overhead.
在传输子载波间隔St与参考子载波间隔Sr相同的情况下,Rrri中的参考资源间距范围(i可以取值为0,1,2,…,N)包括上述资源间距Rt,终端U1将获得与参考资源间距范围Rrri对应的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000113
When the transmission subcarrier interval St is the same as the reference subcarrier interval Sr, the reference resource interval range in Rrri (i can take a value of 0, 1, 2, ..., N) includes the above resource interval Rt, and the terminal U1 will obtain Power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource spacing range Rrri
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000113
在传输子载波间隔St与参考子载波间隔Sr不同的情况下,终端U1可依据传输子载波间隔St、参考子载波间隔Sr、和参考资源间距范围Rrri,确定在传输子载波间隔St下传输资源间距范围Rtri与功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000114
具有如表12所示的对应关系。Rtri中的传输资源间距范围Rtri(i为0,1,…,N)包括上述资源间距Rt,终端U1将获得与传输资源间距范围Rtri对应的功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000115
In the case that the transmission subcarrier interval St is different from the reference subcarrier interval Sr, the terminal U1 can determine the transmission resource under the transmission subcarrier interval St according to the transmission subcarrier interval St, the reference subcarrier interval Sr, and the reference resource interval range Rrri Spacing range Rtri and power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000114
It has the corresponding relationship as shown in Table 12. The transmission resource spacing range Rtri in Rtri (i is 0, 1,..., N) includes the above resource spacing Rt, and the terminal U1 will obtain the power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission resource spacing range Rtri
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000115
可选的,根据参考子载波间隔,参考资源间距范围以及参考功率差阈值的对应关系,可以得到传输子载波间隔和传输资源间距范围对应的功率差阈值。可选的,通过参考子载 波间隔,参考资源间距范围和参考功率差阈值的对应关系(如表11所示),可以得到如下表12中的内容,即传输子载波间隔和传输资源间距范围对应的功率差阈值。比如,可以根据如下的方式确定。或者,也可以采用其他方式,具体的,本申请对此不做限定。Optionally, according to the correspondence between the reference subcarrier interval, the reference resource interval range, and the reference power difference threshold, the power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission subcarrier interval and the transmission resource interval range may be obtained. Optionally, by referring to the correspondence between the subcarrier spacing, the reference resource spacing range, and the reference power difference threshold (as shown in Table 11), the following Table 12 can be obtained, that is, the transmission subcarrier spacing and the transmission resource spacing range correspond to The power difference threshold. For example, it can be determined as follows. Alternatively, other methods may also be used, and specifically, this application does not limit this.
以参考资源间距范围Rrri(i为0,1,…,N)为[Drri_min,Drri_max]、传输资源间距范围Rtri(i为0,1,…,N)为[Dtri_min,Dtri_max]为例,其中,Drri_min和Drri_max分别表示参考资源间距范围Rrri中参考资源间距的最小值和最大值,Dtri_min和Dtri_max分别表示传输资源间距范围Rtri中传输资源间距的最小值和最大值。上述Dtri_min和Dtri_max可满足下式:Take the reference resource interval range Rrri (i is 0, 1,..., N) as [Drri_min, Drri_max], and the transmission resource interval range Rtri (i is 0, 1,..., N) as [Dtri_min, Dtri_max] as an example, where , Drri_min and Drri_max respectively represent the minimum and maximum values of the reference resource distance in the reference resource distance range Rrri, and Dtri_min and Dtri_max respectively represent the minimum and maximum values of the transmission resource distance in the transmission resource distance range Rtri. The above Dtri_min and Dtri_max can satisfy the following formula:
Dtri_min=Drri_min*|Sr-St|,Dtri_max=Drri_max*|Sr-St|;或者,Dtri_min=Drri_min*|Sr-St|, Dtri_max=Drri_max*|Sr-St|; or,
Dtri_min=Drri_min÷|Sr-St|,Dtri_max=Drri_max÷|Sr-St|;或者,Dtri_min=Drri_min÷|Sr-St|, Dtri_max=Drri_max÷|Sr-St|; or,
Dtri_min=Drri_min*2 |Sr-St|,Dtri_max=Drri_max*2 |Sr-St|;或者, Dtri_min=Drri_min*2 |Sr-St| , Dtri_max=Drri_max*2 |Sr-St| ; or,
Dtri_min=Drri_min÷2 |Sr-St|,Dtri_max=Drri_max÷2 |Sr-St|Dtri_min=Drri_min÷2 |Sr-St| , Dtri_max=Drri_max÷2 |Sr-St| .
可以理解,上述Dtri_min与Drri_min以及Dtri_max与Drri_max的函数关系可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或其他终端配置或指示的。It can be understood that the above-mentioned functional relationship between Dtri_min and Drri_min, and Dtri_max and Drri_max may be predefined, or may be configured or instructed by a network device or other terminal.
可选的,传输子载波间隔和传输资源间距范围对应的功率差阈值与参考功率差阈值相同。即在传输子载波间隔下,传输资源间距范围Rtri对应的功率差阈值等于在参考子载波间隔下,参考资源间距范围Rrri对应的功率差阈值。Optionally, the power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission subcarrier interval and the transmission resource interval range is the same as the reference power difference threshold. That is, under the transmission subcarrier interval, the power difference threshold corresponding to the transmission resource interval range Rtri is equal to the power difference threshold corresponding to the reference resource interval range Rrri under the reference subcarrier interval.
可选的,通过参考子载波间隔,参考资源间距范围和参考功率差阈值的对应关系(如表10所示),可以得到如下表12中的内容,即传输子载波间隔和传输资源间距范围对应的功率差阈值。具体可以参考上述方式,或者,也可以采用其他方式,具体的,本申请对此不做限定。Optionally, by referring to the correspondence between the subcarrier spacing, the reference resource spacing range, and the reference power difference threshold (as shown in Table 10), the following Table 12 can be obtained, that is, the transmission subcarrier spacing and the transmission resource spacing range correspond to The power difference threshold. For details, reference may be made to the above manner, or other manners may also be adopted, and specifically, this application does not limit this.
在上述功率差阈值
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000116
与所述参考资源间距范围Rrr具有对应关系的另一种可选的实施方式中,所述对应关系是预定义的。结合表10的示例,该示例示意的功率差阈值与参考资源间距范围的对应关系为预定义的。
At the above power difference threshold
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000116
In another optional implementation manner that has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance range Rrr, the corresponding relationship is predefined. With reference to the example in Table 10, the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource spacing range illustrated in this example is predefined.
表10Table 10
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000117
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000117
表11Table 11
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000118
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000118
表12Table 12
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000119
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000119
结合图3,在本申请上述实施例中,可选地,该方法还可以包括340部分:终端U1 向网络设备或终端U2上报功率差能力和/或资源间距能力,网络设备或终端U2接收该功率差能力和/或资源间距能力。With reference to Figure 3, in the above-mentioned embodiment of the present application, optionally, the method may further include part 340: the terminal U1 reports the power difference capability and/or the resource spacing capability to the network device or the terminal U2, and the network device or the terminal U2 receives the Power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability.
上述功率差能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大功率差值(也可理解为上行链路与侧行链路在相同时域资源上支持的最大功率差值)、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小功率差值(也可理解为上行链路与侧行链路在相同时域资源上支持的最小功率差值)、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的功率差值范围(也可理解为上行链路与侧行链路在相同时域资源上支持的功率差值范围)。The above-mentioned power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link (also can be understood as the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link on the same time domain resources) Maximum power difference), the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link (also can be understood as the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link on the same time domain resource), or the uplink The power difference range supported by the road and side links (also can be understood as the power difference range supported by the uplink and side links on the same time domain resources).
上述资源间距能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大资源间距、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小资源间距、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的资源间距范围。The aforementioned resource spacing capabilities include one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the link.
网络设备或终端U2在收到上述功率差能力和/或资源间距能力后,可以根据该功率差能力和/或资源间距能力为终端U1分配上行链路功率和/或侧行链路功率,从而能够提高功率资源的使用效率。After receiving the aforementioned power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability, the network device or terminal U2 can allocate uplink power and/or side link power to the terminal U1 according to the power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability, thereby Can improve the use efficiency of power resources.
图5为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的交互示意图。如图5所示,该实施例的方法可以包括:FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of interaction of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in FIG. 5, the method of this embodiment may include:
500部分:终端U1向网络设备或终端U2上报功率差能力和/或资源间距能力,网络设备或终端U2接收该功率差能力和/或资源间距能力。关于功率差能力和资源间距能力的具体描述可参考图3中对340部分的描述。Part 500: The terminal U1 reports the power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability to the network device or terminal U2, and the network device or terminal U2 receives the power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability. For a detailed description of the power difference capability and the resource spacing capability, refer to the description of part 340 in FIG. 3.
510部分:网络设备或终端U2向终端U1发送功率控制信息,终端U1接收该功率控制信息、该功率控制信息中包括用于确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率的功率参数。该功率参数可以包括下述参数中的一种或多种:闭环功率参数、或开环功率参数等,其中所述闭环功率参数的数量可以是一个或多个,所述开环功率参数的数量可以是一个或多个。所述闭环功率参数可以是指在闭环功率计算中的功率参数,比如物理层信令中的功率控制信令,具体的,比如可以是下行控制信息中的传输功率控制(transmission power control,TPC)信令等。所述开环功率参数可以是指在开环功率计算中的功率参数,比如路损补偿因子,终端最大传输功率等。其中,闭环功控可以是指发射端根据接收端送来的反馈信息对发射功率进行控制。开环功控可以是指不需要接收端的反馈信息,根据自身的测量进行功率控制。Part 510: The network device or terminal U2 sends power control information to the terminal U1, and the terminal U1 receives the power control information. The power control information includes power parameters for determining the uplink power and the side link power. The power parameter may include one or more of the following parameters: closed-loop power parameters, or open-loop power parameters, etc., wherein the number of the closed-loop power parameters may be one or more, and the number of the open-loop power parameters There can be one or more. The closed-loop power parameter may refer to the power parameter in the closed-loop power calculation, such as power control signaling in physical layer signaling, specifically, for example, transmission power control (TPC) in downlink control information. Signaling etc. The open-loop power parameter may refer to the power parameter in the open-loop power calculation, such as a path loss compensation factor, the maximum transmission power of the terminal, and so on. Among them, closed-loop power control may mean that the transmitting end controls the transmitting power according to the feedback information sent by the receiving end. Open-loop power control can mean that it does not require feedback information from the receiving end and performs power control based on its own measurement.
520部分:终端U1根据上述功率控制信息确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,即终端U1根据上述功率控制信息中的功率参数确定出用于发送上行链路数据的上行链路功率和用于发送侧行链路数据的侧行链路功率。Part 520: The terminal U1 determines the uplink power and the side link power according to the above power control information, that is, the terminal U1 determines the uplink power and usage for transmitting uplink data according to the power parameters in the above power control information. The side link power used to send side link data.
530部分:终端U1根据所述上行链路功率向网络设备发送上行链路数据,以及根据所述侧行链路功率向终端U2发送侧行链路数据。对应地,网络设备接收来自终端U1的上行链路数据,终端U2接收来自终端U1的侧行链路数据。Part 530: The terminal U1 sends uplink data to the network device according to the uplink power, and sends side link data to the terminal U2 according to the side link power. Correspondingly, the network device receives the uplink data from the terminal U1, and the terminal U2 receives the side link data from the terminal U1.
通过上述方法,网络设备或其他终端可以依据终端上报的功率差能力和/或资源间距能力为终端分配合适的功率参数,从而使得终端基于该功率参数确定的上行链路功率和侧行链路功率能够克服共享发送链路时的指标约束,实现上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高传输效率。Through the above method, the network device or other terminal can allocate appropriate power parameters to the terminal according to the power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability reported by the terminal, so that the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power based on the power parameter. It can overcome the indicator constraints when sharing the transmission link, and realize the concurrency of uplink data and side link data, thereby improving transmission efficiency.
图6为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的交互示意图。如图6所示,该实施 例的方法可以包括:FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of interaction of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in Figure 6, the method of this embodiment may include:
600部分:终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr确定功率余量。可选地,该功率余量包括以下一种或多种:上行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000120
上行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000121
上行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000122
侧行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000123
侧行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000124
或侧行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000125
本申请中的功率余量也可称为余量功率、功率余量上报(power headroom report,PHR)、功率冗余、冗余功率、剩余功率、或功率剩余等。关于功率差阈值P thr的描述可参考图3示意的方法中对功率差阈值的描述,此处不再赘述。
Part 600: The terminal U1 determines the power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr . Optionally, the power headroom includes one or more of the following: uplink power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000120
Uplink minimum power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000121
Maximum uplink power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000122
Side link power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000123
Minimum power headroom of side link
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000124
Or the maximum power margin of the side link
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000125
The power headroom in this application may also be referred to as headroom power, power headroom report (PHR), power redundancy, redundant power, surplus power, or power surplus, etc. For the description of the power difference threshold P thr , reference may be made to the description of the power difference threshold in the method illustrated in FIG. 3, which is not repeated here.
610部分:终端U1向网络设备和/或终端U2上报上述功率余量。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1通过PUSCH或PUCCH向网络设备上报上述功率余量。在另一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1通过PSSCH、PSCCH、PSDCH、PSBCH、或PSFCH向终端U2上报上述功率余量。在又一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1通过PUSCH或PUCCH向网络设备上报上述功率余量,以及通过PSSCH、PSCCH、PSDCH、PSBCH、或PSFCH向终端U2上报上述功率余量。Part 610: The terminal U1 reports the above-mentioned power headroom to the network equipment and/or the terminal U2. In a possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 reports the above-mentioned power headroom to the network device through PUSCH or PUCCH. In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 reports the above-mentioned power headroom to the terminal U2 through PSSCH, PSCCH, PSDCH, PSBCH, or PSFCH. In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 reports the above-mentioned power headroom to the network device through PUSCH or PUCCH, and reports the above-mentioned power headroom to the terminal U2 through PSSCH, PSCCH, PSDCH, PSBCH, or PSFCH.
通过上述方法,终端可以依据功率差阈值确定上报的功率余量,使得上报的功率余量更加精准。Through the above method, the terminal can determine the reported power headroom according to the power difference threshold, so that the reported power headroom is more accurate.
可选地,图6示意的方法可以与图3示意的方法结合实施,即可以在图3示意的方法中执行图6中的600部分和610部分。可以理解,在图3示意的方法中,600部分和610部分的执行顺序可以在320部分之后,但本申请并不限定300部分和310部分与600部分和610部分之间的执行顺序。Optionally, the method illustrated in FIG. 6 may be implemented in combination with the method illustrated in FIG. 3, that is, part 600 and part 610 in FIG. 6 may be executed in the method illustrated in FIG. 3. It can be understood that, in the method illustrated in FIG. 3, the execution order of the 600 part and the 610 part may be after the 320 part, but this application does not limit the execution order between the 300 and 310 parts and the 600 and 610 parts.
在600部分中,可选地,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr确定上行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000126
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路功率P UL和侧行链路功率P SL确定上行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000127
所述上行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000128
可满足下式:
In part 600, optionally, the terminal U1 determines the uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000126
In a possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL and the side link power P SL
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000127
The uplink power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000128
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000129
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000129
在另一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路功率P UL、侧行链路功率P SL和终端最大发送功率P UEmax确定上行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000130
其中,终端最大发送功率P UEmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述上行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000131
可满足下式,其中min{x,y}表示x和y中的较小值:
In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL , the side link power P SL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000130
Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000131
The following formula can be satisfied, where min{x,y} represents the smaller value of x and y:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000132
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000132
在又一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路功率P UL、侧行链路功率P SL和最大上行链路功率P ULmax确定上行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000133
其中,最大上行链路功率P ULmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述上行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000134
可满足下式:
In yet another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL , the side link power P SL and the maximum uplink power P ULmax
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000133
Among them, the maximum uplink power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000134
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000135
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000135
在600部分中,可选地,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr确定侧行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000136
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路功率P UL和侧行链路功率P SL确定侧行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000137
所述侧行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000138
可满足下式:
In part 600, optionally, the terminal U1 determines the side link power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000136
In a possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the side link power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL and the side link power P SL
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000137
The side link power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000138
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000139
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000139
在另一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路功率P UL、侧行链路功率P SL和终端最大发送功率P UEmax确定侧行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000140
其中,终端最大发送功率P UEmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述侧行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000141
可满足下式:
In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the side link power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL , the side link power P SL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000140
Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2. The side link power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000141
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000142
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000142
在又一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路功率P UL、侧行链路功率P SL和最大侧行链路功率P SLmax确定侧行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000143
其中,最大侧行链路功率P SLmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述侧行链路功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000144
可满足下式:
In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the side link power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink power P UL , the side link power P SL and the maximum side link power P SLmax
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000143
Among them, the maximum side link power P SLmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2. The side link power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000144
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000145
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000145
在600部分中,可选地,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr确定上行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000146
该上行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000147
可理解为侧行链路采用最小功率P SLmin时上行链路的功率余量。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、侧行链路最小功率P SLmin和上行链路功率P UL确定所述上行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000148
其中,侧行链路最小功率P SLmin可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述上行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000149
可满足下式:
In part 600, optionally, the terminal U1 determines the minimum uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000146
The minimum power headroom of the uplink
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000147
It can be understood as the power headroom of the uplink when the side link uses the minimum power P SLmin . In a possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the uplink minimum power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the side link minimum power P SLmin and the uplink power P UL
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000148
Among them, the side link minimum power P SLmin may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink minimum power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000149
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000150
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000150
在另一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、侧行链路最小功率P SLmin、上行链路功率P UL和终端最大发送功率P UEmax确定所述上行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000151
其中,终端最大发送功率P UEmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。侧行链路最小功率P SLmin可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述上行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000152
可满足下式:
In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the uplink minimum power margin according to the power difference threshold P thr , the side link minimum power P SLmin , the uplink power P UL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax the amount
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000151
Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2. The minimum power P SLmin of the side link may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink minimum power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000152
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000153
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000153
在又一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、侧行链路最小功率P SLmin、上行链路功率P UL和最大上行链路功率P ULmax确定所述上行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000154
其中,最大上行链路功率P ULmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。侧行链路最小功率P SLmin可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述上行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000155
可满足下式:
In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the minimum uplink power according to the power difference threshold P thr , the minimum side link power P SLmin , the uplink power P UL and the maximum uplink power P ULmax margin
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000154
Among them, the maximum uplink power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The minimum power P SLmin of the side link may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink minimum power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000155
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000156
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000156
在600部分中,可选地,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr确定上行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000157
该上行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000158
可理解为侧行链路采用最大功率P SLmax时上行链路的功率余量。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、侧行链路最大 功率P SLmax和上行链路功率P UL确定所述上行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000159
其中,侧行链路最大功率P SLmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述上行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000160
可满足下式:
In part 600, optionally, the terminal U1 determines the maximum uplink power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000157
Maximum power headroom for this uplink
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000158
It can be understood as the power headroom of the uplink when the side link uses the maximum power P SLmax . In a possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the uplink maximum power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the side link maximum power P SLmax and the uplink power P UL
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000159
Wherein, the maximum power P SLmax of the side link may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink maximum power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000160
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000161
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000161
在另一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、侧行链路最大功率P SLmax、上行链路功率P UL和终端最大发送功率P UEmax确定所述上行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000162
其中,终端最大发送功率P UEmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。侧行链路最大功率P SLmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述上行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000163
可满足下式:
In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the uplink maximum power margin according to the power difference threshold P thr , the side link maximum power P SLmax , the uplink power P UL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax the amount
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000162
Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2. The maximum side link power P SLmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink maximum power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000163
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000164
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000164
在又一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、侧行链路最大功率P SLmax、上行链路功率P UL和最大上行链路功率P ULmax确定所述上行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000165
其中,最大上行链路功率P ULmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。侧行链路最大功率P SLmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述上行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000166
可满足下式:
In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the maximum uplink power according to the power difference threshold P thr , the maximum side link power P SLmax , the uplink power P UL and the maximum uplink power P ULmax margin
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000165
Among them, the maximum uplink power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The maximum side link power P SLmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink maximum power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000166
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000167
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000167
在600部分中,可选地,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr确定侧行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000168
该侧行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000169
可理解为上行链路采用最小功率P ULmin时侧行链路的功率余量。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路最小功率P ULmin和侧行链路功率P SL确定所述侧行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000170
其中,上行链路最小功率P ULmin可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述侧行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000171
可满足下式:
In part 600, optionally, the terminal U1 determines the minimum power headroom of the side link according to the power difference threshold P thr
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000168
The minimum power margin of the side link
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000169
It can be understood as the power margin of the side link when the uplink uses the minimum power P ULmin . In a possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the side link minimum power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink minimum power P ULmin and the side link power P SL
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000170
Wherein, the minimum uplink power P ULmin may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The minimum power headroom of the side link
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000171
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000172
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000172
在另一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路最小功率P ULmin、侧行链路功率P SL和终端最大发送功率P UEmax确定所述侧行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000173
其中,终端最大发送功率P UEmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。上行链路最小功率P ULmin可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述侧行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000174
可满足下式:
In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the side link minimum power according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink minimum power P ULmin , the side link power P SL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax margin
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000173
Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2. The minimum uplink power P ULmin may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The minimum power headroom of the side link
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000174
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000175
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000175
在又一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路最小功率P ULmin、侧行链路功率P SL和最大侧行链路功率P SLmax确定所述侧行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000176
其中,最大侧行链路功率P SLmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。上行链路最小功率P ULmin可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述侧行链路最小功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000177
可满足下式:
In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the side link according to the power difference threshold P thr , the minimum uplink power P ULmin , the side link power P SL and the maximum side link power P SLmax Minimum power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000176
Among them, the maximum side link power P SLmax may be predefined, or may be configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The minimum uplink power P ULmin may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The minimum power headroom of the side link
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000177
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000178
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000178
在600部分中,可选地,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr确定侧行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000179
该侧行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000180
可理解为上行链路采用最大功率P ULmax时侧行链路的功率余量。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路最大功率P ULmax和侧行链路功率P SL确定所述侧行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000181
其中,上行链路最大功率P ULmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述侧行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000182
可满足下式:
In part 600, optionally, the terminal U1 determines the maximum power headroom of the side link according to the power difference threshold P thr
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000179
The maximum power margin of the side link
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000180
It can be understood as the power headroom of the side link when the uplink uses the maximum power P ULmax . In a possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the side link maximum power headroom according to the power difference threshold P thr , the uplink maximum power P ULmax and the side link power P SL
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000181
Among them, the uplink maximum power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. Maximum power margin of the side link
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000182
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000183
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000183
在另一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路最大功率P ULmax、侧行链路功率P SL和终端最大发送功率P UEmax确定所述侧行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000184
其中,终端最大发送功率P UEmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。上行链路最大功率P ULmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述侧行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000185
可满足下式:
In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the maximum side link power according to the power difference threshold P thr , the maximum uplink power P ULmax , the side link power P SL and the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax margin
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000184
Among them, the terminal maximum transmit power P UEmax may be predefined, or configured or instructed by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink maximum power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. Maximum power margin of the side link
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000185
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000186
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000186
在又一种可能的实施方式中,终端U1根据功率差阈值P thr、上行链路最大功率P ULmax、侧行链路功率P SL和最大侧行链路功率P SLmax确定所述侧行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000187
其中,最大侧行链路功率P SLmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。上行链路最大功率P ULmax可以是预定义的,也可以是由网络设备或终端U2配置或指示的。所述侧行链路最大功率余量
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000188
可满足下式:
In another possible implementation manner, the terminal U1 determines the side link according to the power difference threshold P thr , the maximum uplink power P ULmax , the side link power P SL and the maximum side link power P SLmax Maximum power headroom
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000187
Among them, the maximum side link power P SLmax may be predefined, or may be configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. The uplink maximum power P ULmax may be predefined, or configured or indicated by the network device or the terminal U2. Maximum power margin of the side link
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000188
The following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000189
Figure PCTCN2020077312-appb-000189
上述各表所示的对应关系可以被配置,也可以是预定义的。各表中的信息的取值仅仅是举例,可以配置为其他值,本申请并不限定。在配置信息与各参数的对应关系时,并不一定要求必须配置各表中示意出的所有对应关系。例如,上述表格中,某些行示出的对应关系也可以不配置。又例如,可以基于上述表格做适当的变形调整,例如,拆分,合并等等。上述各表中标题示出参数的名称也可以采用通信设备可理解的其他名称,其参数的取值或表示方式也可以通信设备可理解的其他取值或表示方式。上述各表在实现时,也可以采用其他的数据结构,例如可以采用数组、队列、容器、栈、线性表、指针、链表、树、图、结构体、类、堆、散列表或哈希表等。The corresponding relationships shown in the above tables can be configured or pre-defined. The value of the information in each table is only an example and can be configured to other values, which is not limited in this application. When configuring the correspondence between the information and the parameters, it is not necessarily required to configure all the correspondences indicated in the tables. For example, in the above table, the corresponding relationship shown in some rows may not be configured. For another example, appropriate deformation adjustments can be made based on the above table, such as splitting, merging, and so on. The names of the parameters indicated in the titles in the above tables may also adopt other names that the communication device can understand, and the values or expression modes of the parameters may also be other values or expression modes that the communication device understands. When the above tables are implemented, other data structures can also be used, such as arrays, queues, containers, stacks, linear tables, pointers, linked lists, trees, graphs, structures, classes, heaps, hash tables, or hash tables. Wait.
本申请中的预定义可以理解为定义、协议定义、预先定义、存储、预存储、预协商、预配置、固化、或预烧制。The pre-definition in this application can be understood as definition, protocol definition, pre-definition, storage, pre-storage, pre-negotiation, pre-configuration, curing, or pre-burning.
本申请中涉及的a与b满足关系(也可以理解为函数关系)的描述并不强制要求a与b精确地满足所述关系。例如,若数值a’与数值b精确地满足所述关系,对数值a’进行去浮点、取整、或四舍五入的操作后获得的数值a,也可以理解为a与b满足所述关系。可以理解的是,a与b满足关系也可以指a与b满足所述关系做等价变形后的关系,本申请实施例对此不做限定。另外可以理解的是,本申请实施例并不限定a与b满足关系的具体 实现方式,例如该映射方式可以通过公式实现,或者该映射方式可以通过表格的形式实现,或者该映射方式也可以通过其他的方式实现,本申请实施例对此不做限定。The description of the relationship between a and b (which can also be understood as a functional relationship) involved in this application does not force a and b to accurately meet the relationship. For example, if the value a'and the value b exactly satisfy the above relationship, the value a obtained by de-floating, rounding, or rounding the value a'can also be understood as a and b satisfying the above relationship. It is understandable that a and b satisfying the relationship may also refer to a relationship in which a and b satisfy the relationship after equivalent modification, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. In addition, it can be understood that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of satisfying the relationship between a and b. For example, the mapping manner may be implemented through a formula, or the mapping manner may be implemented in the form of a table, or the mapping manner may also be implemented through It can be implemented in other ways, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可以理解的是,上述各个方法实施例中由通信设备实现的方法,也可以由可用于通信设备的部件(例如,集成电路,芯片等等)实现。It can be understood that the methods implemented by the communication device in the foregoing method embodiments may also be implemented by components (for example, integrated circuits, chips, etc.) that can be used for communication devices.
相应于上述方法实施例给出的无线通信方法,本申请实施例还提供了相应的通信装置(也可以称为通信设备),所述通信装置包括用于执行上述实施例中每个部分相应的模块。所述模块可以是软件,也可以是硬件,或者是软件和硬件结合。Corresponding to the wireless communication method given in the foregoing method embodiment, the embodiment of the present application also provides a corresponding communication device (also referred to as a communication device). The communication device includes a corresponding communication device for executing each part of the foregoing embodiment. Module. The module can be software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware.
图7给出了一种通信装置的结构示意图。所述通信装置700可以是图1中的网络设备10或20,也可以是图1中的终端11、12、21或22。通信装置可用于实现上述方法实施例中描述的对应于通信设备或节点的方法,具体可以参见上述方法实施例中的说明。Figure 7 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device. The communication device 700 may be the network device 10 or 20 in FIG. 1, or may be the terminal 11, 12, 21, or 22 in FIG. The communication device may be used to implement the method corresponding to the communication device or node described in the foregoing method embodiment. For details, refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment.
所述通信装置700可以包括一个或多个处理器701,所述处理器701也可以称为处理单元,可以实现一定的控制功能。所述处理器701可以是通用处理器或者专用处理器等。例如可以是基带处理器或中央处理器。基带处理器可以用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器可以用于对通信装置(如,基站、基带芯片,DU或CU等)进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。The communication device 700 may include one or more processors 701, and the processor 701 may also be referred to as a processing unit, which may implement certain control functions. The processor 701 may be a general-purpose processor or a special-purpose processor. For example, it can be a baseband processor or a central processing unit. The baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data, and the central processor can be used to control communication devices (such as base stations, baseband chips, DUs or CUs, etc.), execute software programs, and process data in the software programs.
在一种可选的设计中,处理器701也可以存有指令和/或数据703,所述指令和/或数据703可以被所述处理器运行,使得所述通信装置700执行上述方法实施例中描述的对应于通信设备的方法。In an optional design, the processor 701 may also store instructions and/or data 703, and the instructions and/or data 703 may be executed by the processor, so that the communication device 700 executes the foregoing method embodiments. The method described in corresponds to the communication device.
在另一种可选的设计中,处理器701中可以包括用于实现接收和发送功能的收发单元。例如该收发单元可以是收发电路,或者是接口。用于实现接收和发送功能的电路或接口可以是分开的,也可以集成在一起。In another optional design, the processor 701 may include a transceiver unit for implementing receiving and sending functions. For example, the transceiver unit may be a transceiver circuit or an interface. The circuits or interfaces used to implement the receiving and sending functions can be separate or integrated.
在又一种可能的设计中,通信装置700可以包括电路,所述电路可以实现前述方法实施例中发送或接收或者通信的功能。In another possible design, the communication device 700 may include a circuit, and the circuit may implement the sending or receiving or communication function in the foregoing method embodiment.
可选的,所述通信装置700中可以包括一个或多个存储器702,其上可以存有指令704,所述指令可在所述处理器上被运行,使得所述通信装置700执行上述方法实施例中描述的方法。可选的,所述存储器中还可以存储有数据。可选的,处理器中也可以存储指令和/或数据。所述处理器和存储器可以单独设置,也可以集成在一起。例如,上述方法实施例中所描述的各种对应关系可以存储在存储器中,或者存储在处理器中。Optionally, the communication device 700 may include one or more memories 702, on which instructions 704 may be stored, and the instructions may be executed on the processor, so that the communication device 700 executes the foregoing method implementation. The method described in the example. Optionally, data may also be stored in the memory. Optionally, instructions and/or data may also be stored in the processor. The processor and memory can be provided separately or integrated together. For example, the various correspondence relationships described in the foregoing method embodiments may be stored in a memory or in a processor.
所述通信装置700还可以包括收发器705和/或天线706。所述处理器701可以称为处理单元,对通信装置(终端或者网络设备)进行控制。所述收发器705可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路或者收发器等,用于实现通信装置的收发功能。The communication device 700 may further include a transceiver 705 and/or an antenna 706. The processor 701 may be called a processing unit, and controls a communication device (terminal or network device). The transceiver 705 may be called a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit or a transceiver, etc., and is used to implement the transceiver function of the communication device.
在一种可能的设计中,一种装置700(例如,集成电路、无线设备、电路模块,网络设备,终端等)可包括处理器701和收发器705。处理器701获得功率差阈值,根据所述功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率。收发器705根据所述上行链路功率发送上行链路数据,以及根据所述侧行链路功率发送侧行链路数据。可选地,所述上行链路功率与所述侧行链路功率的差值小于或等于所述功率差阈值。In a possible design, an apparatus 700 (for example, an integrated circuit, a wireless device, a circuit module, a network device, a terminal, etc.) may include a processor 701 and a transceiver 705. The processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold, and determines the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold. The transceiver 705 transmits uplink data according to the uplink power, and transmits side uplink data according to the side link power. Optionally, the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is less than or equal to the power difference threshold.
本申请实施例提供的装置,终端可以依据功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路 功率,使得上行链路功率和侧行链路功率的差值小于该功率差阈值,从而在上行链路和侧行链路共享发送链路时克服指标约束,实现上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高传输效率。With the apparatus provided in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that the When the transmission link is shared between the road and the side link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
在上述装置700某些可能的实施方式中,处理器701根据资源间距获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围具有对应关系。可选地,所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围和传输子载波间隔具有对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,处理器701根据所述资源间距和所述传输子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 700, the processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold according to a resource interval, where the resource interval is the resource of the uplink data and the resource of the sidelink data The power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource distance range where the resource distance is located. Optionally, the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and the transmission sub-carrier spacing, wherein the transmission sub-carrier spacing is the uplink data and the side link For the subcarrier interval corresponding to the data, the processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval.
在上述装置700某些可能的实施方式中,处理器701根据资源间距和参考资源间距获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距具有对应关系。可选地,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距和传输子载波间隔具有对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,处理器701根据所述资源间距、所述参考资源间距、和所述传输子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 700, the processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource interval and the reference resource interval, where the resource interval is the resource of the uplink data and the side-link The distance between the resources of the channel data, and the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance. Optionally, the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval and the transmission sub-carrier interval, wherein the transmission sub-carrier interval is a sub-carrier corresponding to the uplink data and the side-link data. Carrier spacing. The processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource spacing, the reference resource spacing, and the transmission subcarrier spacing.
在上述装置700某些可能的实施方式中,处理器701根据资源间距、参考资源间距范围、传输子载波间隔和参考子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距范围具有对应关系。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 700, the processor 701 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource spacing, the reference resource spacing range, the transmission subcarrier spacing, and the reference subcarrier spacing, where the resource spacing is the uplink The distance between the resource of the link data and the resource of the side link data, the transmission subcarrier interval is the subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data, and the power difference threshold It has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance range.
在上述装置700某些可能的实施方式中,收发器705向网络设备上报功率差能力和/或资源间距能力。所述功率差能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大功率差值、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小功率差值、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的功率差值范围。所述资源间距能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大资源间距、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小资源间距、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的资源间距范围。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 700, the transceiver 705 reports the power difference capability and/or the resource spacing capability to the network device. The power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link. The resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
在上述装置700某些可能的实施方式中,处理器701根据所述功率差阈值确定功率余量,收发器705向网络设备上报所述功率余量。可选地,所述功率余量包括上行链路功率余量和/或侧行链路功率余量。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 700, the processor 701 determines the power headroom according to the power difference threshold, and the transceiver 705 reports the power headroom to the network device. Optionally, the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
在另一种可能的设计中,一种装置700(例如,集成电路、无线设备、电路模块,网络设备,终端等)可包括收发器705。收发器705向终端发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置功率差阈值。收发器705接收来自所述终端的上行链路数据或侧行链路数据,其中,所述上行链路数据的上行链路功率与所述侧行链路数据的侧行链路功率的差值小于或等于所述功率差阈值。In another possible design, an apparatus 700 (for example, an integrated circuit, a wireless device, a circuit module, a network device, a terminal, etc.) may include a transceiver 705. The transceiver 705 sends configuration information to the terminal, where the configuration information is used to configure the power difference threshold. The transceiver 705 receives uplink data or side link data from the terminal, wherein the difference between the uplink power of the uplink data and the side link power of the side link data Less than or equal to the power difference threshold.
本申请实施例提供的装置,可以使得终端依据功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,使得上行链路功率和侧行链路功率的差值小于该功率差阈值,从而在上行链路和侧行链路共享发送链路时克服指标约束,实现上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高传输效率。The device provided in the embodiment of the present application can enable the terminal to determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is less than the power difference threshold, so that the When the link and the side link share the transmission link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
在上述装置700某些可能的实施方式中,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与资 源间距所在的资源间距范围的对应关系,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距。可选地,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围和传输子载波间隔的对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 700, the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range where the resource spacing is located, wherein the resource spacing is the value of the uplink data The distance between the resource and the resource of the side link data. Optionally, the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and transmission subcarrier spacing, wherein the transmission subcarrier spacing is the uplink data The sub-carrier interval corresponding to the side link data.
在上述装置700某些可能的实施方式中,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与参考资源间距的对应关系。可选地,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距和传输子载波间隔的对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 700, the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval. Optionally, the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval and transmission subcarrier interval, wherein the transmission subcarrier interval is the uplink data and the side The subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data.
在上述装置700某些可能的实施方式中,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与参考资源间距范围的对应关系。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 700, the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval range.
在上述装置700某些可能的实施方式中,收发器705接收来自所述终端的功率差能力和/或资源间距能力。所述功率差能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大功率差值、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小功率差值、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的功率差值范围。所述资源间距能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大资源间距、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小资源间距、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的资源间距范围。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 700, the transceiver 705 receives the power difference capability and/or the resource spacing capability from the terminal. The power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link. The resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
在上述装置700某些可能的实施方式中,收发器705接收来自所述终端的功率余量。可选地,所述功率余量包括上行链路功率余量和/或侧行链路功率余量。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 700, the transceiver 705 receives the power headroom from the terminal. Optionally, the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
本申请中描述的处理器和收发器可实现在集成电路(integrated circuit,IC)、模拟IC、射频集成电路RFIC、混合信号IC、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、印刷电路板(printed circuit board,PCB)、电子设备等上。该处理器和收发器也可以用各种IC工艺技术来制造,例如互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal oxide semiconductor,CMOS)、N型金属氧化物半导体(nMetal-oxide-semiconductor,NMOS)、P型金属氧化物半导体(positive channel metal oxide semiconductor,PMOS)、双极结型晶体管(Bipolar Junction Transistor,BJT)、双极CMOS(BiCMOS)、硅锗(SiGe)、砷化镓(GaAs)等。The processor and transceiver described in this application can be implemented in integrated circuit (IC), analog IC, radio frequency integrated circuit RFIC, mixed signal IC, application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), printed circuit board ( printed circuit board, PCB), electronic equipment, etc. The processor and transceiver can also be manufactured using various IC process technologies, such as complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), nMetal-oxide-semiconductor (NMOS), and P-type Metal oxide semiconductor (positive channel metal oxide semiconductor, PMOS), bipolar junction transistor (Bipolar Junction Transistor, BJT), bipolar CMOS (BiCMOS), silicon germanium (SiGe), gallium arsenide (GaAs), etc.
虽然在以上的实施例描述中,通信装置以网络设备或者终端为例来描述,但本申请中描述的通信装置的范围并不限于此,而且通信装置的结构可以不受图5的限制。通信装置可以是独立的设备或者可以是较大设备的一部分。例如所述设备可以是:Although in the above description of the embodiments, the communication device is described by taking a network device or a terminal as an example, the scope of the communication device described in this application is not limited to this, and the structure of the communication device may not be limited by FIG. 5. The communication device may be a stand-alone device or may be part of a larger device. For example, the device may be:
(1)独立的集成电路IC,或芯片,或,芯片系统或子系统;(1) Independent integrated circuit IC, or chip, or, chip system or subsystem;
(2)具有一个或多个IC的集合,可选的,该IC集合也可以包括用于存储数据和/或指令的存储部件;(2) A collection with one or more ICs. Optionally, the IC collection may also include storage components for storing data and/or instructions;
(3)ASIC,例如调制解调器(MSM);(3) ASIC, such as modem (MSM);
(4)可嵌入在其他设备内的模块;(4) Modules that can be embedded in other equipment;
(5)接收机、终端、智能终端、蜂窝电话、无线设备、手持机、移动单元、车载设备、网络设备、云设备、人工智能设备等等;(5) Receivers, terminals, smart terminals, cellular phones, wireless devices, handhelds, mobile units, vehicle-mounted devices, network devices, cloud devices, artificial intelligence devices, etc.;
(6)其他等等。(6) Others, etc.
图8提供了一种终端的结构示意图。该终端可适用于图1所示出的系统中。为了便于说明,图8仅示出了终端的主要部件。如图8所示,终端800包括处理器、存储 器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个终端进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。Figure 8 provides a schematic structural diagram of a terminal. The terminal can be applied to the system shown in Figure 1. For ease of description, FIG. 8 only shows the main components of the terminal. As shown in Fig. 8, the terminal 800 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device. The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire terminal, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data. The radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signal and radio frequency signal and the processing of radio frequency signal. The antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
当用户设备开机后,处理器可以读取存储单元中的软件程序,解析并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行处理后得到射频信号并将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到用户设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,该射频信号被进一步转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the user equipment is turned on, the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, parse and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit processes the baseband signal to obtain a radio frequency signal and sends the radio frequency signal out in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. . When data is sent to the user equipment, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, the radio frequency signal is further converted into a baseband signal, and the baseband signal is output to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and performs processing on the data. deal with.
本领域技术人员可以理解,为了便于说明,图8仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端中,可以存在多个处理器和存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等,本发明实施例对此不做限制。Those skilled in the art can understand that, for ease of description, FIG. 8 only shows a memory and a processor. In an actual terminal, there may be multiple processors and memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present invention.
作为一种可选的实现方式,处理器可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图8中的处理器集成了基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。所述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。所述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储单元中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。As an optional implementation, the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit. The baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data. The central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal and execute software. Programs, which process the data of software programs. The processor in FIG. 8 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit. Those skilled in the art can understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors and are interconnected by technologies such as buses. Those skilled in the art can understand that the terminal may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal may be connected through various buses. The baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing the communication protocol and communication data can be built in the processor, or can be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
在一个例子中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和控制电路视为终端800的收发单元811,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端800的处理单元812。如图8所示,终端800包括收发单元811和处理单元812。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元811中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元811中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元811包括接收单元和发送单元。示例性的,接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。可选的,上述接收单元和发送单元可以是集成在一起的一个单元,也可以是各自独立的多个单元。上述接收单元和发送单元可以在一个地理位置,也可以分散在多个地理位置。In an example, the antenna and control circuit with the transceiver function may be regarded as the transceiver unit 811 of the terminal 800, and the processor with the processing function may be regarded as the processing unit 812 of the terminal 800. As shown in FIG. 8, the terminal 800 includes a transceiver unit 811 and a processing unit 812. The transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, and so on. Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiving unit 811 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiving unit 811 can be regarded as the sending unit, that is, the transceiving unit 811 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit. Exemplarily, the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc. Optionally, the foregoing receiving unit and sending unit may be an integrated unit or multiple independent units. The above-mentioned receiving unit and sending unit may be in one geographic location, or may be scattered in multiple geographic locations.
如图9所示,本申请又一实施例提供了一种通信装置(通信设备)900。该通信装置可以是终端(例如图1所示系统中的终端),也可以是终端的部件(例如,集成电路,芯片等等)。该通信装置还可以是网络设备(例如,该通信装置是可以应用到图1系统的基站设备),也可以是网络设备的部件(例如,集成电路,芯片等等)。该通信装置也可以是其他通信模块,用于实现本申请方法实施例中对应于通信设备或节点的操作。该通信装置900可以包括:处理模块902(处理单元)。该通信装置900还可以 包括收发模块901(收发单元)和/或存储模块903(存储单元)。As shown in FIG. 9, another embodiment of the present application provides a communication device (communication equipment) 900. The communication device may be a terminal (for example, the terminal in the system shown in FIG. 1) or a component of the terminal (for example, an integrated circuit, a chip, etc.). The communication device may also be a network device (for example, the communication device is a base station device that can be applied to the system of FIG. 1), or a component of the network device (for example, an integrated circuit, a chip, etc.). The communication device may also be another communication module, which is used to implement the operation corresponding to the communication device or node in the method embodiment of the present application. The communication device 900 may include: a processing module 902 (processing unit). The communication device 900 may also include a transceiving module 901 (transceiving unit) and/or a storage module 903 (storing unit).
在一种可能的设计中,如图9中的一个或者多个模块可能由一个或者多个处理器来实现,或者由一个或者多个处理器和存储器来实现;或者由一个或多个处理器和收发器实现;或者由一个或者多个处理器、存储器和收发器实现,本申请实施例对此不作限定。所述处理器、存储器、收发器可以单独设置,也可以集成。In a possible design, one or more modules as shown in Figure 9 may be implemented by one or more processors, or by one or more processors and memories; or by one or more processors It can be implemented with a transceiver; or implemented by one or more processors, memories, and transceivers, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. The processor, memory, and transceiver can be set separately or integrated.
所述通信装置具备实现本申请实施例描述的终端的功能,比如,所述通信装置包括所述终端执行本申请实施例描述的终端涉及步骤所对应的模块或单元或手段(means),所述功能或单元或手段(means)可以通过软件实现,或者通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。详细可进一步参考前述对应方法实施例中的相应描述。The communication device has the function of implementing the terminal described in the embodiment of this application. For example, the communication device includes the module or unit or means corresponding to the terminal to execute the steps described in the embodiment of this application. The function or unit or means can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. For details, please refer to the corresponding description in the foregoing corresponding method embodiment.
或者所述通信装置具备实现本申请实施例描述的网络设备的功能,比如,所述通信装置包括所述网络设备执行本申请实施例描述的网络设备涉及步骤所对应的模块或单元或手段(means),所述功能或单元或手段(means)可以通过软件实现,或者通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。详细可进一步参考前述对应方法实施例中的相应描述。Or the communication device has the function of implementing the network equipment described in the embodiments of the present application. For example, the communication device includes the modules or units or means corresponding to the steps involved in the network equipment described in the embodiments of the present application. ), the function or unit or means can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. For details, please refer to the corresponding description in the foregoing corresponding method embodiment.
可选的,本申请实施例中的通信装置900中各个模块可以用于执行本申请实施例中图3、图5、或图6描述的方法。Optionally, each module in the communication device 900 in the embodiment of the present application may be used to execute the method described in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, or FIG. 6 in the embodiment of the present application.
在一种可能的设计中,一种装置900可包括收发模块901和处理模块902。处理模块902获得功率差阈值,根据所述功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率。收发模块901根据所述上行链路功率发送上行链路数据,以及根据所述侧行链路功率发送侧行链路数据。可选地,所述上行链路功率与所述侧行链路功率的差值小于或等于所述功率差阈值。In a possible design, an apparatus 900 may include a transceiver module 901 and a processing module 902. The processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold, and determines the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold. The transceiver module 901 transmits uplink data according to the uplink power, and transmits side uplink data according to the side link power. Optionally, the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is less than or equal to the power difference threshold.
本申请实施例提供的装置,终端可以依据功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,使得上行链路功率和侧行链路功率的差值小于该功率差阈值,从而在上行链路和侧行链路共享发送链路时克服指标约束,实现上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高传输效率。With the apparatus provided in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal can determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is smaller than the power difference threshold, so that the When the transmission link is shared between the road and the side link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
在上述装置900某些可能的实施方式中,处理模块902根据资源间距获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围具有对应关系。可选地,所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围和传输子载波间隔具有对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,处理模块902根据所述资源间距和所述传输子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 900, the processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold according to a resource interval, where the resource interval is the resource of the uplink data and the resource of the sidelink data The power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource distance range where the resource distance is located. Optionally, the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and the transmission sub-carrier spacing, wherein the transmission sub-carrier spacing is the uplink data and the side link For the subcarrier interval corresponding to the data, the processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval.
在上述装置900某些可能的实施方式中,处理模块902根据资源间距和参考资源间距获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距具有对应关系。可选地,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距和传输子载波间隔具有对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,处理模块902根据所述资源间距、所述参考资源间距、和所述传输子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 900, the processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold value according to the resource interval and the reference resource interval, where the resource interval is the resource of the uplink data and the side link The distance between the resources of the channel data, and the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance. Optionally, the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval and the transmission sub-carrier interval, wherein the transmission sub-carrier interval is a sub-carrier corresponding to the uplink data and the side-link data. Carrier spacing, the processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold according to the resource spacing, the reference resource spacing, and the transmission subcarrier spacing.
在上述装置900某些可能的实施方式中,处理模块902根据资源间距、参考资源间距 范围、传输子载波间隔和参考子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距范围具有对应关系。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 900, the processing module 902 obtains the power difference threshold value according to the resource interval, the reference resource interval range, the transmission subcarrier interval, and the reference subcarrier interval, where the resource interval is the uplink The distance between the resource of the link data and the resource of the side link data, the transmission subcarrier interval is the subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data, and the power difference threshold It has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance range.
在上述装置900某些可能的实施方式中,收发模块901向网络设备上报功率差能力和/或资源间距能力。所述功率差能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大功率差值、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小功率差值、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的功率差值范围。所述资源间距能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大资源间距、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小资源间距、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的资源间距范围。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 900, the transceiver module 901 reports the power difference capability and/or the resource spacing capability to the network device. The power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link. The resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
在上述装置900某些可能的实施方式中,处理模块902根据所述功率差阈值确定功率余量,收发模块901向网络设备上报所述功率余量。可选地,所述功率余量包括上行链路功率余量和/或侧行链路功率余量。In some possible implementations of the foregoing apparatus 900, the processing module 902 determines the power headroom according to the power difference threshold, and the transceiver module 901 reports the power headroom to the network device. Optionally, the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
在另一种可能的设计中,一种装置900可包括收发模块901。收发模块901向终端发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置功率差阈值。收发模块901接收来自所述终端的上行链路数据或侧行链路数据,其中,所述上行链路数据的上行链路功率与所述侧行链路数据的侧行链路功率的差值小于或等于所述功率差阈值。In another possible design, a device 900 may include a transceiver module 901. The transceiver module 901 sends configuration information to the terminal, where the configuration information is used to configure the power difference threshold. The transceiver module 901 receives uplink data or side link data from the terminal, where the difference between the uplink power of the uplink data and the side link power of the side link data Less than or equal to the power difference threshold.
本申请实施例提供的装置,可以使得终端依据功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率,使得上行链路功率和侧行链路功率的差值小于该功率差阈值,从而在上行链路和侧行链路共享发送链路时克服指标约束,实现上行链路数据和侧行链路数据的并发,进而提高传输效率。The device provided in the embodiment of the present application can enable the terminal to determine the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold, so that the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is less than the power difference threshold, so that the When the link and the side link share the transmission link, the index constraint is overcome, and the concurrency of the uplink data and the side link data is realized, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
在上述装置900某些可能的实施方式中,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与资源间距所在的资源间距范围的对应关系,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距。可选地,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围和传输子载波间隔的对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 900, the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range where the resource spacing is located, where the resource spacing is the value of the uplink data. The distance between the resource and the resource of the side link data. Optionally, the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located and transmission subcarrier spacing, wherein the transmission subcarrier spacing is the uplink data The sub-carrier interval corresponding to the side link data.
在上述装置900某些可能的实施方式中,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与参考资源间距的对应关系。可选地,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距和传输子载波间隔的对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 900, the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval. Optionally, the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval and transmission subcarrier interval, wherein the transmission subcarrier interval is the uplink data and the side The subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data.
在上述装置900某些可能的实施方式中,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与参考资源间距范围的对应关系。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 900, the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval range.
在上述装置900某些可能的实施方式中,收发模块901接收来自所述终端的功率差能力和/或资源间距能力。所述功率差能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大功率差值、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小功率差值、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的功率差值范围。所述资源间距能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大资源间距、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小资源间距、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的资源间距范围。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 900, the transceiver module 901 receives the power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability from the terminal. The power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link. The resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
在上述装置900某些可能的实施方式中,收发模块901接收来自所述终端的功率余 量。可选地,所述功率余量包括上行链路功率余量和/或侧行链路功率余量。In some possible implementation manners of the foregoing apparatus 900, the transceiver module 901 receives the power headroom from the terminal. Optionally, the power headroom includes uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例中的一些可选的特征,在某些场景下,可以不依赖于其他特征,比如其当前所基于的方案,而独立实施,解决相应的技术问题,达到相应的效果,也可以在某些场景下,依据需求与其他特征进行结合。相应的,本申请实施例中给出的装置也可以相应的实现这些特征或功能,在此不予赘述。It is understandable that some optional features in the embodiments of the present application, in some scenarios, may not depend on other features, such as the solutions they are currently based on, but are implemented independently to solve corresponding technical problems and achieve corresponding The effect can also be combined with other features according to requirements in some scenarios. Correspondingly, the devices given in the embodiments of the present application can also implement these features or functions accordingly, which will not be repeated here.
本领域技术人员还可以了解到本申请实施例列出的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step)可以通过电子硬件、电脑软件,或两者的结合进行实现。这样的功能是通过硬件还是软件来实现取决于特定的应用和整个系统的设计要求。本领域技术人员可以对于每种特定的应用,可以使用各种方法实现所述的功能,但这种实现不应被理解为超出本申请实施例保护的范围。Those skilled in the art can also understand that the various illustrative logical blocks and steps listed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by electronic hardware, computer software, or a combination of both. Whether such a function is realized by hardware or software depends on the specific application and the design requirements of the entire system. Those skilled in the art can use various methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be understood as going beyond the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
本申请所描述的技术可通过各种方式来实现。例如,这些技术可以用硬件、软件或者硬件结合的方式来实现。对于硬件实现,用于在通信装置(例如,基站,终端、网络实体、或芯片)处执行这些技术的处理单元,可以实现在一个或多个通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、数字信号处理器件(DSPD)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、可编程逻辑器件(PLD)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)、或其它可编程逻辑装置,离散门或晶体管逻辑,离散硬件部件,或上述任何组合中。通用处理器可以为微处理器,可选地,该通用处理器也可以为任何传统的处理器、控制器、微控制器或状态机。处理器也可以通过计算装置的组合来实现,例如数字信号处理器和微处理器,多个微处理器,一个或多个微处理器联合一个数字信号处理器核,或任何其它类似的配置来实现。The technology described in this application can be implemented in various ways. For example, these technologies can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware. For hardware implementation, the processing unit used to execute these technologies at a communication device (for example, a base station, a terminal, a network entity, or a chip) can be implemented on one or more general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), digital Signal processing device (DSPD), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), programmable logic device (PLD), field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware component, or the above In any combination. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, and optionally, the general-purpose processor may also be any traditional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine. The processor can also be implemented by a combination of computing devices, such as a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors combined with a digital signal processor core, or any other similar configuration achieve.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解:本申请中涉及的第一、第二等各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围,也表示先后顺序。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个。至少两个是指两个或者多个。“至少一个”、“任意一个”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个、种),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。A person of ordinary skill in the art can understand that the various digital numbers such as first and second involved in the present application are only for easy distinction for description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application, but also indicate a sequence. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are in an "or" relationship. "At least one" means one or more. At least two means two or more. "At least one", "any one" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item (a) or plural items (a). For example, at least one (piece, species) of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, and c can be single or Multiple.
本申请实施例中所描述的方法或算法的步骤可以直接嵌入硬件、处理器执行的指令、或者这两者的结合。存储器可以是RAM存储器、闪存、ROM存储器、EPROM存储器、EEPROM存储器、寄存器、硬盘、可移动磁盘、CD-ROM或本领域中其它任意形式的存储媒介。例如,存储器可以与处理器连接,以使得处理器可以从存储器中读取信息,并可以向存储器存写信息。可选地,存储器还可以集成到处理器中。处理器和存储器可以设置于ASIC中,ASIC可以设置于终端中。可选地,处理器和存储器也可以设置于终端中的不同的部件中。The steps of the method or algorithm described in the embodiments of the present application can be directly embedded in hardware, instructions executed by a processor, or a combination of the two. The memory can be RAM memory, flash memory, ROM memory, EPROM memory, EEPROM memory, register, hard disk, removable disk, CD-ROM or any other storage medium in the art. For example, the memory can be connected to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the memory and can write information to the memory. Optionally, the memory can also be integrated into the processor. The processor and the memory can be arranged in the ASIC, and the ASIC can be arranged in the terminal. Optionally, the processor and the memory may also be arranged in different components in the terminal.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储 在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据包中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据包中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据包中心等数据包存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。上面的组合也应当包括在计算机可读介质的保护范围之内。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data package. The center transmits to another website, computer, server, or data packet center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data packet storage device such as a server or a data packet center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)). The above combination should also be included in the protection scope of the computer-readable medium.
本申请中各个实施例之间相同或相似的部分可以互相参考。在本申请中各个实施例、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例、以及各实施例中的各个实施方式/实施方法/实现方法中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例、实施方式、实施方法、或实现方法。以上所述的本申请实施方式并不构成对本申请保护范围的限定。The same or similar parts between the various embodiments in this application can be referred to each other. In each embodiment of this application, and each implementation method/implementation method/implementation method in each embodiment, if there is no special description and logical conflict, between different embodiments and each implementation manner in each embodiment/ The terms and/or descriptions between the implementation methods/implementation methods are consistent and can be mutually cited. The technical features in different embodiments and various implementation modes/implementation methods/implementation methods in each embodiment are based on their inherent The logical relationship can be combined to form a new embodiment, implementation, implementation method, or implementation method. The implementations of the application described above do not constitute a limitation on the protection scope of the application.

Claims (27)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it comprises:
    获得功率差阈值;Obtain the power difference threshold;
    根据所述功率差阈值确定上行链路功率和侧行链路功率;Determining the uplink power and the side link power according to the power difference threshold;
    根据所述上行链路功率发送上行链路数据,以及根据所述侧行链路功率发送侧行链路数据。The uplink data is transmitted according to the uplink power, and the side uplink data is transmitted according to the side link power.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行链路功率与所述侧行链路功率的差值小于或等于所述功率差阈值。The method according to claim 1, wherein the difference between the uplink power and the side link power is less than or equal to the power difference threshold.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获得功率差阈值,包括:根据资源间距获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围具有对应关系。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the obtaining the power difference threshold comprises: obtaining the power difference threshold according to a resource interval, wherein the resource interval is the sum of the resources of the uplink data For the distance between the resources of the side link data, the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource distance range where the resource distance is located.
  4. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获得功率差阈值,包括:根据资源间距和参考资源间距获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距具有对应关系。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the obtaining the power difference threshold comprises: obtaining the power difference threshold according to a resource interval and a reference resource interval, wherein the resource interval is the uplink The distance between the data resource and the sidelink data resource, and the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource distance.
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围和传输子载波间隔具有对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔;The method according to claim 3, wherein the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the resource interval range where the resource interval is located and the transmission subcarrier interval, wherein the transmission subcarrier interval is the uplink The sub-carrier interval corresponding to the channel data and the side link data;
    所述根据资源间距获得所述功率差阈值,包括:根据所述资源间距和所述传输子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值。The obtaining the power difference threshold according to the resource interval includes: obtaining the power difference threshold according to the resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval.
  6. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距和传输子载波间隔具有对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔;The method according to claim 4, wherein the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource interval and the transmission subcarrier interval, wherein the transmission subcarrier interval is the uplink data and the transmission subcarrier interval. The sub-carrier interval corresponding to the side uplink data;
    所述根据资源间距和参考资源间距获得所述功率差阈值,包括:根据所述资源间距、所述参考资源间距、和所述传输子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值。The obtaining the power difference threshold according to the resource interval and the reference resource interval includes: obtaining the power difference threshold according to the resource interval, the reference resource interval, and the transmission subcarrier interval.
  7. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获得功率差阈值,包括:根据资源间距、参考资源间距范围、传输子载波间隔和参考子载波间隔获得所述功率差阈值,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔,所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距范围具有对应关系。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the obtaining the power difference threshold value comprises: obtaining the power difference threshold value according to a resource interval, a reference resource interval range, a transmission subcarrier interval, and a reference subcarrier interval, wherein , The resource spacing is the spacing between the resources of the uplink data and the resources of the side link data, and the transmission subcarrier spacing is the distance between the uplink data and the side link data Subcarrier spacing, the power difference threshold has a corresponding relationship with the reference resource spacing range.
  8. 根据权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-7, wherein the method further comprises:
    向网络设备上报功率差能力和/或资源间距能力;Report power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability to network equipment;
    所述功率差能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大功率差值、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小功率差值、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的功率差值范围;The power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link;
    所述资源间距能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大资源间距、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小资源间距、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的资源间距范围。The resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-8, wherein the method further comprises:
    根据所述功率差阈值确定功率余量,以及向网络设备上报所述功率余量。Determine the power headroom according to the power difference threshold, and report the power headroom to the network device.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率余量包括上行链路功率余量和/或侧行链路功率余量。The method according to claim 9, wherein the power headroom comprises uplink power headroom and/or side link power headroom.
  11. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it comprises:
    向终端发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置功率差阈值;Sending configuration information to the terminal, where the configuration information is used to configure a power difference threshold;
    接收来自所述终端的上行链路数据或侧行链路数据,其中,所述上行链路数据的上行链路功率与所述侧行链路数据的侧行链路功率的差值小于或等于所述功率差阈值。Receiving uplink data or side link data from the terminal, wherein the difference between the uplink power of the uplink data and the side link power of the side link data is less than or equal to The power difference threshold.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与资源间距所在的资源间距范围的对应关系,其中,所述资源间距为所述上行链路数据的资源与所述侧行链路数据的资源的间距。The method according to claim 11, wherein the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range in which the resource spacing is located, wherein the resource spacing is the uplink data The distance between the resource and the resource of the sidelink data.
  13. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与参考资源间距的对应关系。The method according to claim 11, wherein the configuration information is used to configure the correspondence between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval.
  14. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与所述资源间距所在的资源间距范围和传输子载波间隔的对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔。The method according to claim 12, wherein the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the resource spacing range where the resource spacing is located and the transmission subcarrier spacing, wherein the transmission subcarrier The carrier interval is the subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data.
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与所述参考资源间距和传输子载波间隔的对应关系,其中,所述传输子载波间隔为所述上行链路数据和所述侧行链路数据对应的子载波间隔。The method according to claim 13, wherein the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource interval and transmission subcarrier interval, wherein the transmission subcarrier interval is The subcarrier interval corresponding to the uplink data and the side link data.
  16. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息用于配置所述功率差阈值与参考资源间距范围的对应关系。The method according to claim 11, wherein the configuration information is used to configure the corresponding relationship between the power difference threshold and the reference resource spacing range.
  17. 根据权利要求11-16任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-16, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述终端的功率差能力和/或资源间距能力;Receiving power difference capability and/or resource spacing capability from the terminal;
    所述功率差能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大功率差值、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小功率差值、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的功率差值范围;The power difference capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum power difference supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink The power difference range supported by the side link;
    所述资源间距能力包括下述中的一种或多种:上行链路与侧行链路支持的最大资源间距、上行链路与侧行链路支持的最小资源间距、或上行链路与侧行链路支持的资源间距范围。The resource spacing capability includes one or more of the following: the maximum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, the minimum resource spacing supported by the uplink and the side link, or the uplink and the side link The range of resource spacing supported by the uplink.
  18. 根据权利要求11-17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:接收来自所述终端的功率余量,所述功率余量包括上行链路功率余量和/或侧行链路功率余量。The method according to any one of claims 11-17, further comprising: receiving a power headroom from the terminal, the power headroom comprising uplink power headroom and/or side Uplink power headroom.
  19. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置用于执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that the communication device is used to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-10.
  20. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置用于执行如权利要求11-18中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that the communication device is used to execute the method according to any one of claims 11-18.
  21. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储程序或指令,当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述装置执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising: a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a program or instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor, the device Perform the method according to any one of claims 1-10.
  22. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储程序或指令,当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述装置执行如 权利要求11-18中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising: a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a program or instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor, the device Perform the method according to any one of claims 11-18.
  23. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序或指令,其特征在于,所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium having a computer program or instruction stored thereon, wherein the computer program or instruction is executed to cause a computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-10.
  24. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序或指令,其特征在于,所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行如权利要求11-18中任一项所述的方法。A computer readable storage medium having a computer program or instruction stored thereon, wherein the computer program or instruction is executed to cause a computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 11-18.
  25. 一种通信系统,包括:如权利要求21所述的装置和/或如权利要求22所述装置。A communication system, comprising: the device according to claim 21 and/or the device according to claim 22.
  26. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品中包括计算机程序代码,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机实现权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法或者实现权利要求11至18中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, the computer program product comprising computer program code, characterized in that, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is caused to implement the method or any one of claims 1-10 The method described in any one of claims 11 to 18 is implemented.
  27. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括:处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储程序或指令,当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述芯片执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法或者如权利要求11至18中任一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized by comprising: a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a program or instruction, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor, the chip executes The method according to any one of claims 1-10 or the method according to any one of claims 11-18.
PCT/CN2020/077312 2019-03-28 2020-02-29 Communication method and apparatus WO2020192360A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910244329.5A CN111757449B (en) 2019-03-28 2019-03-28 Communication method and device
CN201910244329.5 2019-03-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020192360A1 true WO2020192360A1 (en) 2020-10-01

Family

ID=72608912

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/077312 WO2020192360A1 (en) 2019-03-28 2020-02-29 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN111757449B (en)
WO (1) WO2020192360A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116830685A (en) * 2021-01-28 2023-09-29 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for determining power

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101902750A (en) * 2009-05-26 2010-12-01 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Method for adjusting power parameter value and equipment
CN103190196A (en) * 2010-10-13 2013-07-03 诺基亚公司 Selection of communication mode
WO2014180518A1 (en) * 2013-05-08 2014-11-13 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Improved handling of simultaneous network communication transmission and d2d communication transmission
US20150124737A1 (en) * 2012-07-05 2015-05-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for controlling power for device-to-device (d2d) communication in wireless communication system and apparatus for same

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101902750A (en) * 2009-05-26 2010-12-01 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Method for adjusting power parameter value and equipment
CN103190196A (en) * 2010-10-13 2013-07-03 诺基亚公司 Selection of communication mode
US20150124737A1 (en) * 2012-07-05 2015-05-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for controlling power for device-to-device (d2d) communication in wireless communication system and apparatus for same
WO2014180518A1 (en) * 2013-05-08 2014-11-13 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Improved handling of simultaneous network communication transmission and d2d communication transmission

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111757449A (en) 2020-10-09
CN111757449B (en) 2022-05-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020143835A1 (en) Power control method and power control apparatus
WO2020134944A1 (en) Interference measurement method and communication apparatus
US11564181B2 (en) Method and apparatus for reporting power headroom report, and method and apparatus for obtaining power headroom report
WO2020143829A1 (en) Method and device for sending and receiving instructions
WO2019214424A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
JP2021503834A (en) Carrier switching methods, devices and systems for multi-carrier communication
US11490387B2 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
WO2019096030A1 (en) Frequency hopping processing method and device
US20220183029A1 (en) Method for sending and receiving control information, apparatus, and system
WO2019029463A1 (en) Method and device for receiving control information and sending control information
WO2020135179A1 (en) Power control method and device
WO2021026916A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus and device
US20210399866A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022062838A1 (en) Resource configuration method and apparatus
WO2020192360A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2020192719A1 (en) Beam updating method and communication apparatus
JP2023514730A (en) Feedback resource determination method and feedback resource determination device
WO2022147735A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining sending power
WO2020199814A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022110245A1 (en) Resource indication method and apparatus
US20230362928A1 (en) Pucch transmission method and apparatus
WO2021244386A1 (en) Signal transmission method and related device therefor
WO2021032167A1 (en) Method and device for determining transport block size
WO2023077463A1 (en) Beam determination method and apparatus
WO2024032064A1 (en) Power control method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20780007

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20780007

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1